Sunteți pe pagina 1din 308

Service Manual

HITACHI Printer
Model UX

Revision July. 1.2015


Version -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


[ Revision of UX service manual ]

Revision Chapter Revised Page

Frist Edition - - -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Contents

1. Introduction ································································································1-1
1.1 Safety precautions ·················································································1-1
1.2 Structure of each part in the main body ······················································ 1-8
1.2.1 External views ·················································································1-8
1.2.2 Main body internal ··········································································· 1-9
1.2.3 Print head ······················································································ 1-10
1.3 Installation ···························································································1-11
1.3.1 Power supply wiring ··········································································· 1-11
1.3.2 Installation procedure ······································································· 1-13

2. Maintenance work ·······················································································2-1


2.1 Setting of service personnel maintenance mode ··········································· 2-1
2.2 System environment setup ·······································································2-4
2.3 Adjustment/operational checkout ······························································· 2-5
2.3.1 Excitation adjustment ·········································································2-5
2.3.2 Charging voltage confirmation ····························································2-8
2.3.3 Phase margin test ············································································ 2-10
2.3.4 Auto phase gain adjustment ······························································· 2-13
2.3.5 Level sensor confirmation ··································································2-15
2.3.6 Heating unit confirmation ··································································· 2-17
2.4 Test of solenoid valve/pump ···································································· 2-19
2.5 Download ····························································································2-20
2.6 Calibration of viscometer ········································································ 2-22
2.6.1 Calibration of viscometer ··································································· 2-22
2.6.2 Operation test of viscometer ······························································2-23
2.7 Circulation system environment setup ······················································ 2-24
2.8 System reset ·······················································································2-25
2.9 Back up ······························································································2-26
2.10 Unit information ·················································································· 2-27
2.11 Handling of the warning ”Product Speed Matching Error”, etc. ····················· 2-29
2.12 Language registration ··········································································2-34
2.13 Fault / Warning log management code ···················································· 2-36
2.14 Software option set up ········································································· 2-38
2.14.1 Software option setup for UX-D,E ······················································ 2-38
2.14.2 Standard communication option setup for UX-B ··································· 2-39
2.15 Upgrade option setup for UX-D ·····························································2-40
2.16 Time of preparing for printing (UX-D,E only) ·············································· 2-42
2.17 Touch screen setup ··············································································2-44
2.18 Expiration date management of ink and makeup ········································ 2-45

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


2.19 Careful Cleaning Setup ········································································· 2-48
2.20 Logging data ·······················································································2-51
2.21 Rescue soft ························································································ 2-57
2.22 Dimensions for Tapered-Printhead Printing ··············································· 2-59

3. Maintenance of controlling part······································································· 3-1


3.1 Construction of controlling part ································································ 3-1
3.2 Controller part ·····················································································3-5
3.2.1 EZJ128 board (controller board) ························································· 3-5
3.2.2 Battery ··························································································3-8
3.2.3 LCD ······························································································3-10
3.2.4 Touch panel ····················································································3-12
3.3 Engine part····························································································3-13
3.3.1 EZJ126 board (MPU board) ································································3-13
3.3.2 Battery ··························································································3-16
3.3.3 Model Key ······················································································3-17
3.3.4 Language Key (Option) ····································································· 3-17
3.3.5 Upgrade Key (Option) ·······································································3-17
3.3.6 EZJ125 board (Nozzle drive board)·······················································3-19
3.3.7 EZJ127 board (I/O board) ··································································· 3-21
3.3.8 EZJ132 board (Ink circulation module connection board) ························· 3-29
3.3.9 EZJ113 board (Power relay board) ······················································ 3-29
3.3.10 EZJ114 board (LED / SW board) ·······················································3-31
3.3.11 EZJ119A board (Relay output board) (Optional board) ························· 3-31
3.3.12 EZJ130 board (Software option control board) ······································· 3-33
3.3.13 EZJ129 board (Software option terminal board) ····································· 3-35
3.3.14 Multiple Power Supply ··································································· 3-43
3.3.15 High voltage power supply ······························································· 3-45
3.3.16 DC fan ·························································································3-46
3.3.17 TUP-I (for UX-D/E only) ···································································3-47
3.3.18 IJP LAN Unit (ILU) (Option) ····························································3-48
3.3.19 RFID reader ··················································································· 3-49
3.3.20 Electrical Connection Diagram ··························································· 3-51

4. Maintenance of Circulation System ································································4-1


4.1 Structure of Circulation System··································································4-1
4.2 Main Ink Tank Replacement Procedure ·······················································4-6
4.3 Pressure Reducing Valve Replacement Procedure ········································ 4-10
4.4 Joint Structure and Handling ····································································· 4-11
4.5 Solenoid Valves Replacement Procedure ···················································· 4-12
4.6 Pressure Sensor Replacement Procedure ··················································· 4-14

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


4.7 Circulation Unit Replacement Procedure ···················································· 4-16
4.8 Pump Parts Replacement ······································································· 4-18
4.9 Circulation Filter Replacement Procedure ···················································· 4-29
4.10 Ink/Makeup Reservoir Replacement Procedure··········································· 4-30
4.11 Solenoid Replacement Procedure ···························································· 4-34
4.12 Troubleshooting when Fault Occurs in Viscometer ······································· 4-37
4.13 Print Head Replacement Procedure ··························································4-42
4.14 Troubleshooting Procedure for the Circulation System ·································· 4-45
4.15 Repairing Method When the Circulation Route Is Dry or Sticks ····················· 4-50
4.16 Maintenance Work of Intake fan unit ························································ 4-52
4.17 R air filter Replacement Procedure ··························································4-54
4.18 Liquid Spill Check on Exhaust Duct ························································· 4-56
4.19 Circulation system cleaning of printer which uses Ethanol-based ink ··············· 4-57
4.20 Cleaning of dedicated path for Low volatilization system (UX-E only) ··············· 4-59

5. Print head related maintenance ···································································· 5-1


5.1 Print head rough configuration···································································5-1
5.2 Cable running direction ············································································ 5-3
5.3 Gutter configuration and replacement method ·············································· 5-4
5.3.1 Gutter configuration ···········································································5-4
5.3.2 Replacement method ·········································································5-4
5.4 MGV filter replacement ············································································ 5-5
5.5 Shutoff valve (MV9) replacement ······························································· 5-7
5.6 Heating unit replacement ·········································································5-9
5.7 APH board replacement ···········································································5-11
5.8 Nozzle replacement ················································································ 5-12
5.9 Nozzle Orifice Cleaning ···········································································5-14
5.10 Mist collector maintenance (applied UX-E only) ··········································· 5-16
5.11 Thermistor replacement ·········································································· 5-17
5.12 Deflecting Base Replacement Procedure ··················································· 5.19
5.13 Head base Replacement Procedure ························································· 5-22
5.14 Head Cable Replacement Procedure ························································ 5-24

6. Troubleshooting ··························································································6-1
6.1 Troubleshooting List ················································································6-1
6.2 Faults - Ink-stop type ············································································· 6-3
6.3 Faults - Print-stop type ············································································· 6-29
6.4 Warning conditions (printing continuously performed)····································· 6-43
6.5 Faults - No on-screen indications ·······························································6-58

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


7. Attached Drawing ························································································7-1
7.1 Circulation system diagram ····································································· 7-1
7.2 Electrical Connection Diagram ·································································7-4
7.3 Circulation sequence ··············································································· 7-6
7.4 Dimensions around charge electrode and deflection electrode ························· 7-8

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1. Introduction
1.1 Safety precautions

Before starting the maintenance and inspection work of this printer, thoroughly read
and understand the “safety precautions”.
When explaining the product to customers at the time of the installation, fully explain
the “safety precautions”.

● Before using the printer, thoroughly read the following safety precautions for optimum printer use.
● You should observe the precautions set forth below in order to use the product properly and avoid
endangering or causing damage to you or other persons. For the purpose of clarifying the
severity of injury or damage and likelihood of occurrence, the precautions are classified into two
categories, WARNING and CAUTION, which both describe the hazardous situations that may
arise if you ignore the precautions and perform an incorrect handling or operating procedure.
The precautions in these two categories are both important and must therefore be observed
without fail.

WARNING is used to indicate the presence of a hazard which may


WARNING cause severe personal injury or death if the warning against
performing an incorrect handling procedure is ignored.
CAUTION is used to indicate the presence of a hazard which may
CAUTION cause personal injury or property damage if the warning against
performing an incorrect handling procedure is ignored.

● If the warning in the CAUTION category is ignored, serious results may occur depending on the
situation.
● After the manual has been read, it must be stored in such a location that all printer operation
personnel can refer to it at all times.
● All the instructions set forth in this manual are important and must therefore be observed without
fail.

Pictograph Examples

The △ symbols are used to indicate precautions (including those related to potential
warnings) to be observed. Detailed information is furnished by a picture within the
symbol outline (a shock hazard is indicated by the example shown at left).
The ○ symbols are used to describe prohibited actions. The details of a prohibited
action are given by a picture within or near the symbol outline (the example shown at
left dictates that you must keep flames away).
The ● symbols are used to describe required actions. Detailed instructions are
given by a picture within the symbol outline (the example shown at left dictates that a
ground connection must be made).

1-1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


SAFETY PRECAUTIONS (Continued)
WARNING
● Ensure that there is no flame- or arc-generating device around the
printer.
The ink and makeup are both flammable and may cause fire.
Fire can be generated by matches, lighters, cigarettes, heaters, stoves, gas
burners, welders, grinders and static electricity. Arcs may be generated from
open-type relays, switches, and brush motors. Before handling the ink and
makeup, remove static electricity from your body, peripheral equipment, and so
on. In the interest of safety, position a dry-chemical fire extinguisher near the
printer.

● Since the ink and makeup contain organic solvents, install the
printer at an adequately ventilated location.
①Never install the printer in an enclosed space.
②Connect exhaust equipment to the printer in order to prevent it from filling with
organic solvent vapor.

● Do not insert tweezers, a screwdriver, or any other metal article


into the ink ejection hole in the end of the print head.
When the printer is ready to print, a high voltage (approximately 6 kV) is applied to
the deflection electrode section in the print head.
Exercise caution to avoid electric shock, injury, and fire.

● Be sure to shut off the power before replacing electrical


components (power, PC board, etc.). Be sure to unplug the power
cable from the electrical outlet before performing work with the
inlet cover and/or side cover off (terminal block transfer, EZJ113
board replacement, etc.).
Failure to do so could result electrical shock, injury or fire.

● Use an AC voltage of 100 to120 V or 200 to 240 V only and a power


frequency of 50 or 60 Hz only.
If the above requirements are not met, the electric parts may overheat and burn,
creating a risk of fire or electric shock.

● Use the power cable that is designated in this manual.

● Wire the power supply in accordance with this manual.

1-2

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


SAFETY PRECAUTIONS (Continued)
WARNING
● Never drain the ink or makeup waste solution into a public sewer
system.
Waste disposal must comply with all appropriate regulations.
Consult the appropriate regulatory agency for further information.

● Exercise caution to avoid inadvertently disconnecting, forcibly


pulling, or bending piping tubes.
Since the ink and makeup in some portions of piping tubes are pressurized, they
may splash into your eyes or mouth or onto your hands or clothing.
If any ink or makeup enters your eyes or mouth, immediately flush with warm or
cold water and consult a physician.

● While the printer is operating, do not look into the ink ejection hole
in the end of the print head.
Ink or makeup may enter your eyes or mouth or soil your hands or clothing.
If any ink or makeup enters your eyes or mouth, immediately flush with warm or
cold water and consult a physician.

● Before servicing the printer, be sure to stop the ink ejection.


Because ink or makeup may splash into your eyes or mouth or onto your hands or
clothing. If any ink or makeup enters your eyes or mouth, immediately flush with
warm or cold water and consult a physician.

● If an earthquake, fire, or other emergency occurs while the printer


is engaged in printing or just turned on, press the Main power
switch to turn off the power.

● The printer must be managed in compliance with all appropriate


regulations.
Check the supplementary manual (Ink) for the ink used.

● Use Hitachi approved consumables and periodic replacement


parts.
Using products that are not designated by Hitachi could cause s failure in
certain functions.

1-3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


SAFETY PRECAUTIONS (Continued)
WARNING
● When charging a refill of ink or makeup, exchanging ink, or
otherwise handling ink or makeup, take enough care not to spill
ink or makeup.
If you spill any ink or makeup by mistake, wipe it off neatly and
promptly with wiping paper or something similar. Do not close the
maintenance cover until you make sure that the portion you have
just wiped is completely dry.
You must pay particular attention when you have spilled ink or
makeup inside the printer and it is not completely dry. Why?
Because vapors of ink or makeup will stay inside the printer and
may catch on or cause a fire.
If you find it hard to wipe the printer when it is turned on, stop it with the
maintenance cover open. Power it down, and then wipe it off again.

● If you wish to clean the casing of the printer with wiping paper
impregnated with makeup, be sure to do so with the power off.
Attempting to clean it when the power is on will cause makeup or vapors of
makeup to enter the printer, possibly catching on or causing a fire.
When the cleaning is over, open the maintenance cover and make sure that no
makeup has entered and no vapors remain inside.

● Should you find a leak of ink or makeup inside the printer while the
printer is running or being maintained, wipe it off promptly with
wiping paper or something similar. Then, with the maintenance
cover open, stop the printer, power it down, and repair the leak.
Continuing operation with a leak of ink or makeup will cause an anomaly,
resulting in abnormal printing.
Ink and makeup are flammable. They may therefore catch on or cause a fire

●The ink and makeup, their waste solution, used wiping papers and
empty containers are flammable. Waste disposal must comply with
appropriate regulations. Consult the appropriate regulatory agency
for further information.

● If you wish to receive ink particles in a beaker, for a printing test for
example, use an electrically conductive beaker and connect the
beaker securely to the ground.
Do not let the tip of the printing head enter the beaker.
Ink particles used for printing are electrically charged. An ungrounded beaker has
a gradually rising charge, possibly catching on or causing a fire.

● Make sure the ground wire is properly connected to the ground


of the electrical outlet.
Failure to do so could result electrical shock or fire.

1-4

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


SAFETY PRECAUTIONS (Continued)
WARNING
● When welding, keep enough space between the IJ printer and the
welding work area to prevent the arc from starting a fire. Also, be
sure to insulate the print head and IJ printer frame to keep the
welding current from flowing to the control section of the printer,
and to make a separate ground connection for the printer.
Exercise caution to avoid electric shock and fire.
●Keep all fire away.
○Ink and Makeup are flammable.
○All fire must be kept away from the machine.
○Spilled Ink and Makeup must be wiped off and dried up immediately.

●Caution when handling Ink/Makeup


○Strage must comply with local regulatory requirements .
○Read and understand Safety Data Sheet(SDS).
○Be sure to wear protective gloves and safety goggies.
○If the Ink/Makeup in used is an organic solvent,it must be managed in compliance
with the Ordinance on the prevention or Organic Solvent poisoning.Refer to
the "Instruction Manual"and the "Handling guidance of each ink" for details.

AVERTISSEMENT
●Tenir hors de portée du feu.
○L’encre et la composition sont inflammables.
○Tenir la machine hors de portée du feu.
○Nettoyez et séchez immédiatement les projections d’encre et de composition.

●Soyez prudent lorsque vous manipulez l’encre/la composition


○Le stockage doit respecter les obligations réglementaires locales.
○Lisez attentivement la fiche signalétique de sécurité de l’appareil (FSSP).
○Assurez-vous de porter des gants et des lunettes de protection.
○Si l’encre/la composition utilisée est un solvant biologique, vous devez le manipuler
conformément au décret sur la prévention des empoisonnements par solvant biologique.
Reportez-vous au «Mode d’emploi» et aux «Conseils de manipulation de chaque type d’encre»
pour plus de détails.

1-5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


SAFETY PRECAUTIONS (Continued)
CAUTION
● Use the printer in an ambient temperature prescribed for each nozzle
diameter and ink and 30 to 90%RH (no condensation) environment.
①When using the printer in 85 to 90%RH environment, air purge the print head.
②Using the printer outside the specified conditions may cause abnormal printing and
erroneous operation and trouble.

● Since the ink and makeup contain organic solvents, observe the
following handling precautions.
①Secure adequate space for the ink/makeup handling area and printer installation
site. At least 200 m3 must be provided per print head.
②Ensure that adequate ventilation is provided.
When handling the ink or makeup, wear protective gloves and safety goggles to
avoid direct skin contact. If the ink or makeup comes into contact with skin, wash
thoroughly with soap and warm or cold water.
③When transferring the ink or makeup to or from a bottle, exercise caution to prevent
it coming into contact with the printer or surrounding articles.
If there is any spillage, immediately wipe it clean using a cloth moistened with
makeup.
④Since the vapor pressure of the makeup is generally high, if the ambient
temperature is high such as in the summer, etc., the internal pressure will rise and
makeup could spurt out when the outside cover is removed. Therefore, when
unplugging,
● do not hold the bottle near your face
● place the can on a level surface
● open while covering the opening with a rag, etc.

● Ink and makeup must be stored as flammable liquids. Storage must


comply with local regulatory requirements. Consult the appropriate
regulatory agency for further information.
● Ink and makeup must be handled in compliance with the Industrial
Safety and Health Law and PRTR Law (environmental contaminant
discharge/emigration/transfer registration). For information on
handling, see the Safety Data Sheet (SDS). The SDS can be accesses
from the following web site or from our sales office.
URL http://www.hitachi-ies.co.jp/ijp
● If extraneous noise enters the printer, it may malfunction or break
down.
For maximum noise immunity, observe the following installation and
wiring precautions.
①Ensure that 100 to 120 VAC or 200 to 240 VAC power cables are not bundled with
other power supply cables.
②Insulate the printer main body and print head so that they do not come into direct
contact with the conveyor or other devices.
③If the employed print target detector is housed in a metal case, use a plastic
mounting brace for the purpose of insulating the detector from the conveyor and
other devices.
④Be sure that the print target detector wiring is not bundled together with other power
supply cables.

1-6

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


SAFETY PRECAUTIONS (Continued)
CAUTION
● When handling PC boards and electric parts, be careful of static
electricity.
PC boards and electric parts mount elements weak against static electricity. When
handling PC boards and electric parts remove the static electricity by wearing a
suitably grounded anti-static wrist band.

● A touch panel is employed for data entry to operation screen.


When manipulating the Touch panel, use only fingers. If the touch
panel is operated with metal and/or sharp objects such as ball
point pen, it may malfunction or break down.

● When replaced with an incorrect type of battery, the battery is in


danger of exploding. Be sure to replace the battery with the one
specified by parts list.

When disposing of the battery (lithium battery), you must comply with local
regulatory requirements. Consult the appropriate regulatory agency for further
information.

ATTENTION
● Si vous remplacez avec un mauvais type de batterie, elle risque
d’exploser. Assurez-vous d’utiliser une batterie indiquée dans la
liste des pièces..

Lorsque vous jetez la batterie (au lithium), vous devez respecter les obligations
réglementaires locales. Consultez l’agence de réglementation appropriée pour
obtenir de plus amples informations..

1-7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1.2 Structure of each part in the main body
1.2.1 External views

(1)External views (UX-E,D)

(2)External views (UX-B)

1-8

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


(2)External views (Rear side)

1.2.2 Main body internal

[Appearance with inner cover (T) removed]

1-9

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1.2.3 Print head

【UX-D、B】

【UX-E】

Air exhaust port

1-10

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1.3 Installation
1.3.1 Power supply wiring

! Caution
•Use the proper plug. Be sure to ground properly.
•Locate the equipment near an electrical outlet and arrange so it can be easily
disconnected.
•Use a power cable that is within the specified range.
•Do not bundle the light electrical cable together with the power cable outside the
unit so the light electrical signals (connection signals to the various signal

[Applicable power cable]

Use a power cable that meets the following requirements:


Connector specs: IEC inlet connector (3-pin, L-type)
Cable of following shape and dimensions
Outer diameter: Ø7 - 10 mm
Min. conductor size: 0.75 mm2
Max. cable length: 5 m (cable should be as short as possible)
Other specs: Cable should conform to safety standards in country where it is used.

Max. 25

*Be careful of orientation of part


to be inserted and cable. 38.5 - 44.5
Min. 18
Max. 30

Max. 60

Ø7 - Ø10

Precautions concerning UL
If used in North America, use a cable that meets the following requirements in addition to those
given above.
Standard: UL/CUL certified
Rating: 125 V, 7A or more
Plug: NEMA5-15P
Cable: Type SJT, 18AWG, 60 °C or higher
Cable length: 1.5 - 4.5 m

1-11

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1 Remove the inlet cover. (Fastening screws x 4)

Inlet cover

Precautions concerning electrical shock


Be sure to unplug the power cable from the electrical outlet before
performing work.

2 Mount the power cable in the inlet and mount the inlet cover.

Caution

•Be sure to mount the inlet


Inlet base cover.

•Wrap the attached cable seal


Inlet cover
around the power cable and
set in the position shown in
the figure.

Side cover

Cable seal
Power cable

1-12

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1.3.2 Installation procedure
Perform an installation work of the unit according to the following procedure at the
unpacking.

1 The cap of the compensating port is detach. Supply port cap Supply port cap
(Caution 1)

Ink reservoir Makeup reservoir


2 Service personnel maintenance mode setup Service Manual
procedure 2.1 Setting of service personnel
maintenance mode

3 Selection of ink type(Touch screen Service Manual


operation) 2.2 System environment setup

4 Fill ink and makeup in each reservoir. Instruction manual


8. Ink and Makeup replenishment
<NOTE>If the makeup in the Cartridge
bottle is used as a cleaning solution,
pour the contents in the cleaning bottle
before the cartridge bottle is set.

5 Ink stream alignment Technical Manual


(For filling makeup path and adjusting ink stream 6.5 Stream alignment
position)

6 Replenish the ink in the main ink tank. Press Installation Ink refill on
And fill ink in the ink circulation routes. < Circulation control >.screen.
(Replace solvent with ink) <NOTE>Insert the tip of the Printhead
into the beaker at Ink refill.

7 Ink replenishment (second replenishment) Press Ink drainage on < Circulation


(Fill ink into a circulating system) control >.screen. Follow the guidance
displayed on the screen to perform Ink
drainage.

8 Ink replenishment (second replenishment) Press Ink refill on < Circulation control
(Fill ink into a circulating system) >.screen.
<NOTE>Insert the tip of the Printhead
into the beaker at Ink refill.

9 Pressure adjustment Technical Manual


(Set pressure to the standard value of every ink) 6.9 Adjusting the pressure

10 Adjustment of excitation voltage Service Manual


(Touch screen operation, automatic acquisition) 2.3.1 Excitation adjustment

1-13

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


11 Adjustment of APH gain Service Manual
(Touch screen operation, automatic acquisition) 2.3.4 Auto phase gain adjustment

12 Setting of excitation voltage Technical Manual


(Confirm the real printing state and the ink drop 6.10 Excitation V adjustment
mode and then, set the excitation voltage)

13 Readjustment of APH gain Service Manual


(Touch screen operation, automatic acquisition) 2.3.4 Auto phase gain adjustment

14 Editing Print Data, etc. Instruction Manual


(Print start delay, character height, etc.) 4. Creation and printing of messages

15 Back up(backup in service staff maintenance Service Manual


mode) 2.9 Back up

[Caution]
1) The Caps which took off in step 1 is used at “Long –term Shutdown”, so please keep
them.

1-14

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


2. Maintenance work
A screen for use in the maintenance work by a service personnel is described.

2.1 Setting of service personnel maintenance mode


● Set service personnel maintenance mode to perform maintenance work by service
personnel such as system environment setup.
Features of service personnel maintenance mode (differences with user maintenance mode)
No Function Contents
The second page of the maintenance menu can be displayed.
1 Maintenance menu Can boot system environment setup; upgrade setup, download,
option setup, and various system initialization functions.
2 Unit information The ink coefficient can be changed.
Operation The cumulative operating time can be changed.
3
management Displays “heating unit temperature” and “ink temperature”.
Displays “excitation voltage reading”, “ambient temperature”
4 Excitation V update
and “ink pressure”.
5 Fault/warning history Displays Clear; can clear Fault/warning history.
Circulation control
6 Can boot Viscometer calibration function.
menu
Parts usage time
7 The time of the pump and the solenoid valves can be changed.
management
Sets whether or not to display the message informing the user
Circulation system that “ink concentration control has been set to disable” when
8
environment setup the power is turned on if “ink concentration control” is set to
“disable.”
Displays version of ink management table.
Software management
9 Displays version of booting system (program loader) in
(View software version)
parentheses next to the version display.
Solenoid valve / pump Multiple operations of the solenoid valve can be carried out
10
test simultaneously.
Displays “Product Speed Matching Error”, “Arabic pattern
11 User environment setup
variation” and “Minimum character height value”.
12 Touch screen setup Displays “Status Color” and “Standby/Ready Change Button”.
13 Login management Displays Clear; can clear login history.
Backup Backs up logging data that records history of operation status
14
(IJP  USB) (including text file).
Data copy Can copy unit-specific data (environment setup values,
15 (USB  IJP) operation time, etc.) to IJP if serial number is the same as
when backing up.
New language data to save are stored and the input mode
16 Select language
can be selected.
17 Fault The fault, No ink drop charge, does not invoke ink stoppage.
Periodic replacement The exchange cycle of the pump and solenoid valve can be
18
parts mgmt. changed.
● A “USB memory containing system data” is needed to perform the following maintenance
work by service personnel.
Functions requiring USB memory containing system data
№ Function Contents
System environment Required when changing the nozzle diameter setup. The
1
setup USB memory is not required for other setting.
2 Download Required when updating program.
Required when new language data to save are stored.
3 Select language
The USB memory is not required for other setting.

Note: Use a USB memory that complies with USB 2.0/1.1 interface and
FAT16 or FAT32 file system.

2-1
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
[Service personnel maintenance mode setup procedure]

1 Printing description screen is displayed.

LOGIN

2 Press LOGIN.

The login user select screen is displayed.

2-2
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
3 Select any user.

The keyboard for inputting the password is displayed.

Shift

Enter

4 Input password “HIESmmdd” and press Enter. (mm: Month, dd: Day)
Example: If date is December 31, 2015, input “HIES1231.”
[Caution] The password “HIESmmdd” is a special password for enabling
functions not disclosed to the customer. Do not disclose the password
to the customer.

When password is accepted, the equipment enters service personnel maintenance mode
and the printing description screen is displayed.

When in service personnel maintenance mode, this line of the screen turns [yellow].

Print description [Stop ] Com=0 2015.07.07 12:45


Message name[ ] Current user ID : admin
Start
<< >> Manual
up

- +

Single
scan

Ink operating time 0 (hours)


Makeup Ink
Cumulative op. time 0 (hours)

Print count 0 (prints)

Ink pressure 0.000 (MPa; standard value: 0.250)

Auxiliary Environment Select Create/Edit


Maintenance Menu
function setup menu login user message

[Caution] After completion of service maintenance work, be sure to return to


the user maintenance mode. The service personnel maintenance
mode is canceled by setting of “Service maintenance” to “protect” on
Password protection menu. When the power is turned off, the service
personnel maintenance mode is automatically canceled.
When in service personnel maintenance mode, the Touch screen is
turned off if there is no panel input within 15 minutes regardless of
the Display setting on Touch screen setup screen. The equipment
returns to user maintenance mode at this time.

2-3
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
2.2 System environment setup
●The setting with respect to the system environment of the IJ printer is performed.
① Ink type ② Cable length
③ Nozzle size ④ Ink temperature correction
⑤ Excitation frequency ⑥ Excitation curve
⑦ Ambient temperature upper limit ⑧ Ambient temperature lower limit
⑨ Excitation setting (Max.)
●A “USB memory containing system data” is needed to set nozzle size.
●This setting is performed in the IJ printer "Stop" state.

1 The maintenance menu is displayed.


If Prev. menu Next menu is not displayed on the maintenance menu, set the service
personnel maintenance mode on the login user selection screen.
For information on changing to the service personnel maintenance mode,
refer to “2.1 Setting of service personnel maintenance mode.”

2 Press System environment setup on the second page of the maintenance


menu.
The system environment setup screen is then displayed.

System env. setup [Stop ] Com=0 2015.07.07 12:45

Ink type - 001 + (1067K )


Cable length 4 (m)
Nozzle diameter 65 ( m)
Ink temperature correction disable enable

Excitation freq. - 68.9 + (kHz; standard value: 68.9)


Excitation curve 01 (standard value: 0)
*)
Ambient temp. upper lim. 45 ( ; 40-50; standard value:45)
Ambient temp. lower lim. 00 ( ; 0- 5; standard value: 0)
Excitation V-ref. (Max) 19 (19-27)

The Radio Law is approved No Yes


Back

Back

3 Modify the setting values.


*) Note: This item is automatically reset to the initial value when ink type is changed.

4 When setup is complete, press Back.

The screen returns to the maintenance menu.

[Note]
When change the ink type, Ink concentration control switch to enable on circulation environment
screen.
Set disable when does not use the Ink concentration control function on circulation environment
screen.

2-4
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
2.3 Adjustment/operational checkout
2.3.1 Excitation adjustment
● Adjust the drive conditions of nozzles.
● This adjustment is performed in a state other than the IJ printer “ready” state.
● Be sure to perform this adjustment in the case of replacing the board (EZJ126, 125, 128), or the
nozzle (including the print head) or changing the ink type.
In addition, when this adjustment is performed, be sure to carry out “2.3.4 Auto phase gain
adjustment.”

1 Press Adjustment/operational checkout on the maintenance menu.


If Adjustment/operational checkout is not displayed on the maintenance menu, set the service
personnel maintenance mode on the login user selection screen.
For information on changing to the service personnel maintenance mode,
refer to “2.1 Setting of service personnel maintenance mode.”

The adjustment/operational checkout menu is then displayed.


Adjust./oper. checkout [Stop ] Com=0 2015.07.07 12:45

Start
Manual
Excitation Charge voltage up
Phase margin test
adjustment confirmation HOME

Auto-phase gain Level sensor Heating unit


adjustment confirmation confirmation

Back

Excitation adjustment
2 Press Excitation adjustment.
The excitation adjustment screen is then displayed.
Adjust./oper. checkout [Stop ] Com=0 2015.07.07 12:45

<Excitation adjustment>
Excitation voltage value 0752 (0-2047)

Automatic adjustment

Automatic
adjustment

Proc. status: Back

2-5
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
3 Press Automatic adjustment.
During automatic adjustment, “in progress” is displayed as the processing status.

Proc. status: In progress

The excitation voltage is automatically adjusted inside the IJ printer.


The excitation voltage is gradually increased, and the adjustment is completed
at 360 V ± 20V p-p. (Excitation adjustment is automatically completed within 90 seconds.)

4 When completed, the processing status is displayed to be “Ended”.

Proc. status: Ended

5 If automatic adjustment fails, the Manual adjustment key is displayed.

Adjust./oper. checkout [Stop ] Com=0 2015.07.07 12:45

<Excitation adjustment>
Excitation voltage value 0752 (0-2047)

Manual
adjustment
Automatic
adjustment

Back
Proc. status: Failed

Manual adjustment
Main causes of automatic adjustment failure
№ Cause
1 The connection of the EZJ126 board and EZJ125 board is insufficient.
2 The dip switch on the EZJ125 board is incorrectly set.
3 The connection of the coaxial cable connector for excitation (EZJ125 CN5) is
insufficient.
4 Replacement parts are out of order (EZJ126/EZJ125 board, nozzle, head
cable).

2-6
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
When you press Manual adjustment and manually input the excitation voltage adjustment
value, the excitation voltage value is increased or decreased. Check the waveform of TP14
(excitation voltage) on the EZJ125 board with an oscilloscope.

For the position of the board and test pins, refer to “3.3.6 EZJ125 board.”

Adjust./oper. checkout [Stop ] Com=0 2015.07.07 12:45

<Excitation adjustment>
Excitation voltage value 0752 (0-2047)

Back
Proc. status: In progress

Excitation voltage value

[Waveform of excitation voltage]

Vp-p

Model Vp-p
UX 360±20V

2-7
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
2.3.2 Charging voltage confirmation
● Voltage for confirmation of charging voltage is output for 3 minutes.
● Be sure to perform this confirmation when performing the board exchange (EZJ126 and 125).
●This confirmation is performed in a state the IJ printer “stop” state.

1 Press Adjustment/operational checkout on the maintenance menu.


If Adjustment/operational checkout is not displayed on the maintenance menu, set the
service personnel maintenance mode on the login user selection screen.
For information on changing to the service personnel maintenance mode,
refer to “2.1 Setting of service personnel maintenance mode.”

The adjustment/operational checkout menu is then displayed.


Adjust./oper. checkout [Stop ] Com=0 2015.07.07 12:45

Start
Manual
Excitation Charge voltage up
Phase margin test
adjustment confirmation HOME

Auto-phase gain Level sensor Heating unit


adjustment confirmation confirmation

Back

Charge voltage confirmation


2 Press Charge voltage confirmation.
The Charge voltage confirmation screen is then displayed.
The voltage for confirmation is output for 3 minutes.
Adjust./oper. checkout [Stop ] Com=0 2015.07.07 12:45

<Charge voltage confirmation>


Execution takes 3 minutes.

Abort

Abort

Proc. status: In progress

2-8
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
3 Measure TP12 of the EZJ125 board with an oscilloscope and make sure it is
within the range of DC250V ± 15V.

For the position of the board and test pins, refer to “3.3.6 EZJ125 board.”

[Waveform of charge voltage confirmation]

Charge voltage

← GND level

When confirmation is completed, press Abort and you can stop work before 3 minutes elapse.

2-9
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
2.3.3 Phase margin test
●Perform the phase margin test of a nozzle.
●This test is performed to check the following:
① whether or not the nozzle is in a printable state (whether or not clogging is present) and
② whether or not ink is deteriorated.
●This test is performed with the IJ printer on “standby” state.

1 Press Adjustment/operational checkout on the maintenance menu.


If Adjustment/operational checkout is not displayed on the maintenance menu, set the
service personnel maintenance mode on the login user selection screen.
For information on changing to the service personnel maintenance mode,
refer to “2.1 Setting of service personnel maintenance mode.”

The adjustment/operational checkout menu is then displayed.


Adjust./oper. checkout [Standby ] Com=0 2015.07.07 12:45

Start
Manual
Excitation Charge voltage up
Phase margin test
adjustment confirmation HOME

Auto-phase gain Level sensor Heating unit


adjustment confirmation confirmation

Back

2 Press Phase margin test. Phase margin test


The phase margin test screen is then displayed.
Adjust./oper. checkout [Standby ] Com=0 2015.07.07 12:45

<Phase margin test>


Print timing Button input Sensor
Print data For test Data to be displayed
Print phase Automatic update Specified phase

Start

Start

Back
Proc. status: In progress

2-10
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
3 Select the setting values for print timing, print data and print phase.
Setting items for phase margin test
№ Item Setting Contents
value
Button Prints each time Start printing is pressed.
1 Print timing input
Sensor Prints for each print sensor signal input.
The printing conditions are automatically set as
described below.
Number of line : one row
Dot matrix : 12×16 dots
Inter-character space :1
Character height : 99 :
Character width :5
Ink drop use percentage : f/3
For test Product speed matching : none
2 Print data
The content of printing is as described below.
■■ A B C 1 2 3

Printed phase Printed phase which is set at present


(16 phases in total (A phase determined to be most suitable)
from 0 to f)

Display Prints according to print conditions/contents currently


data set for print target data.
Automatic Prints print phases in sequence from 0 to 15 (f).
update (Total of 16 prints per cycle)
3 Print phase
Specified Print phase can be specified by pressing Increment /
phase Decrement.

4 Press Start.
The phase margin test in progress screen is then displayed.

Example of [Print timing: Button input]


Adjust./oper. checkout [Ready ] Com=0 2015.07.07 12:45

<Phase margin test>


Print timing Button input Sensor
Print data For test Data to be displayed
Print phase Automatic update Specified phase
Printing starts at the press of [Start printing].
Print phase: X-phase (0-f)

Abort Start
printing

Start
Proc. status: In progress printing

2-11
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Example of [Print timing: Sensor]
Adjust./oper. checkout [Ready ] Com=0 2015.07.07 12:45

<Phase margin test>


Print timing Button input Sensor
Print data For test Data to be displayed
Print phase Automatic update Specified phase
Printing starts upon signal from sensor.
Print phase: X-phase (0-f)

Abort

Abort

Dec. Inc.
Proc. status: In progress

To quit before the process is complete, press Abort.


Specify phase.

5 Determination method of test.


View the printing results for phases 0 to 15 (f), and if printing is normal within the range of one
phase before to one phase after the “print phase which is set at present”, there is no problem.

If printing is not normal within the range of one phase before to one phase after the print
phase which is set at present, the nozzle may be clogged or ink quality may have
deteriorated. Clean the nozzle, replace ink, etc.

[Print contents ]
■■ A B C 1 2 3

Printed phase Printed phase which is set at present


(16 phase in total (a phase determined to be suitable)
from 0 to f)

(Example)
:
5 7 ■■ A B C 1 2 3
6 7 ■■ A B C 1 2 3
7 7 ■■ A B C 1 2 3 Range of one phase before to one phase after the
8 7 ■■ A B C 1 2 3 print phase which is set at present
9 7 ■■ A B C 1 2 3
:

2-12
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
2.3.4 Auto phase gain adjustment
● The gain of the auto phase detection voltage is automatically adjusted.
● Perform this adjustment after confirmation that the periphery of a gutter part within the nozzle
head is not made dirty with ink or the like and the printing head cover is correctly fixed.
● Be sure to perform this adjustment in the case of replacing the boards (EZJ126, 125, 128) or the
nozzle (including the print head) or changing the ink type.
● Perform this adjustment before “Excitation voltage setting”. After setting the optimum
excitation voltage, repeat this adjustment.
● This adjustment is performed when the IJ printer is in a “Drop adjust” or “Standby” state.

1 Press Adjustment/operational checkout on the maintenance menu.


If Adjustment/operational checkout is not displayed on the maintenance menu, set the
service personnel maintenance mode on the login user selection screen.
For information on changing to the service personnel maintenance mode,
refer to “2.1 Setting of service personnel maintenance mode.”

The adjustment/operational checkout menu is then displayed.


Adjust./oper. checkout [Standby ] Com=0 2015.07.07 12:45

Start
Manual
Excitation Charge voltage up
Phase margin test
adjustment confirmation HOME

Auto-phase gain Level sensor Heating unit


adjustment confirmation confirmation

Back

2 Press Auto-phase gain adjustment. Auto-phase gain adjustment


The auto-phase gain adjustment screen then appears.
Adjust./oper. checkout [Standby ] Com=0 2015.07.07 12:45

<Auto-phase gain adjustment>


Auto-phase gain value 40 (2-62)

Automatic acquisition

Automatic Back
acquisition
Back
Proc. status:

2-13
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
3 Press Automatic acquisition.
During automatic acquisition, “acquisition” is displayed as the processing state.

Proc. status: Acquisition

Auto-phase detection voltage gain is automatically adjusted in the IJ printer.

A target of the auto-phase gain value is about from “20” to “40” (65μm).

4 After the completion of the automatic adjustment, when the Back key is pressed,
the auto phase detection voltage is output and therefore, confirm the waveform by
an oscilloscope.

Using the oscilloscope, confirm that the voltage of TP1 (APH voltage) on the EZJ125 board
is from 8 to 10 V as the maximum voltage, 2 V or less as the minimum voltage, and is
“normal” as shown in the following figure.

For the position of the board and test pins, refer to “3.3.6 EZJ125. board.”

Normal Abnormal
10ms Maximum voltage Noise large
from 8 to 10 V

Minimum voltage
Noise small 2 V or less

5 When the automatic adjustment is not normally completed or the wave form is
“abnormality”, confirm that the periphery of the gutter part is made dirty with ink or
makeup. When dirtiness or the like is present, wash the periphery of the gutter
part, surely dry it and then, perform the automatic-adjustment again.

Numerical values of the auto phase gain value can also be input by a ten-key. To the value
set at present, if the auto phase gain value is set large, the gain becomes high, whereas if it
is set small, the gain becomes low. When the “return” key is input, the auto phase
detection voltage is output and the auto phase gain value is reflected.

2-14
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
2.3.5 Level sensor confirmation
● The liquid level and the operation of level sensors of the main ink tank, ink reservoir, and
makeup reservoir will be confirmed.
№ Container type Level sensor
1 Too high [OF]
2 Initial level [1] / Sensor [1]
Main ink tank
3 Sensor [2]
4 Sensor [3]
Level sensor confirmation of
5 Sensor [1] Initial[1]/Sensor[1], Sensor[2]
6 Ink reservoir Sensor [2] and Sensor[3] can NOT be
7 Sensor [3] conducted in “Standby” state.
It is recommended to conduct
8 Sensor [WHITE] the Level sensor confirmation
Makeup reservoir
9 Sensor [RED] in ”Stop” state

● Conduct this test in "Stop" or "Standby" state.

1 Press Adjustment/operational checkout on the maintenance menu.


If Adjustment/operational checkout is not displayed on the maintenance menu, set the
service personnel maintenance mode on the login user selection screen.

“Adjustment/operational checkout menu” is then displayed.


For information on changing to the service personnel maintenance mode,
refer to “2.1 Setting of service personnel maintenance mode.”

Adjust./oper. checkout [Stop ] Com=0 2015.07.07 12:45

Start
Manual
Excitation Charge voltage up
Phase margin test
adjustment confirmation HOME

Auto-phase gain Level sensor Heating unit


adjustment confirmation confirmation

Back

Level sensor confirmation


2-15
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
2 Press Level sensor confirmation.
The level sensor confirmation screen is then displayed.
Adjust./oper. checkout [Stop ] Com=0 2015.07.07 12:45

<Level sensor confirmation>


WHITE
<Main ink tank> <Ink reservoir> <Makeup reservoir>

Too high [OF] Sensor [1] Sensor [□]


undetected detected detected RED
Sensor [2]
detected

Initial [1] Sensor [3] Sensor [■]


detected detected detected

Back

Back
Proc. status: In progress

Container
Level sensor Undetected Detected
type
The sensor is not detecting The sensor detected “overflow”
Too high [OF]
Main “overflow” level. level. (Abnormal)
ink tank The sensor is not detecting the
Initial level [1] The sensor detected the level.
level.
The sensor is not detecting the Ink is present.
Sensor [1]
level. (Cartridge replacement can NOT be made)
Ink The sensor is not detecting the Ink is present.
reservoir Sensor [2]
level. (Cartridge replacement can NOT be made)

Sensor [3] “Ink Low Warning” is appears. Ink is present.


(Cartridge replacement can be made)
Makeup is present.
(Cartridge replacement can NOT be made)
Sensor [WHITE] The sensor is not detecting the The float is located at upper
(Float : UPPER) level. side and “Sensor [WHITE]” is
Makeup ON.
reservoir “Makeup Low Warning” is
Sensor [RED] appears. Makeup is present.
(Float : LOWER) The float is located at lower side (Cartridge replacement can be made)
and “Sensor [RED]” is ON.

[Note] When the printer is in “Stop” state, and “High Temperature Print Control” is set to ”Enable”,
the dialog box shown below will be displayed in place of “Initial [1]” of <Main ink tank> on
the screen. (Refer to “6.17 High Temperature Print Control” in Technical Manual.)
When High Temperature Print Control is set to “Enable”, Sensor [2] will represent the initial
level. When High Temperature Print Control set to “Disable”, Sensor [1] will represent the
initial level instead.

Sensor [1]
detected

Sensor [2]
detected

Sensor [3]
detected

2-16
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
2.3.6 Heating unit confirmation
● The operation confirmation of heating unit is performed.
① Heating unit power ON/OFF.
● A display of an ambient temperature and a heating unit temperature is performed.
● Perform this operation confirmation in a state other than "Ready" state.

1 Press Adjustment/operational checkout on the maintenance menu.


If Adjustment/operational checkout is not displayed on the maintenance menu, set the
service personnel maintenance mode on the login user selection screen.

For information on changing to the service personnel maintenance mode,


refer to “2.1 Setting of service personnel maintenance mode.”

The Adjustment/operational checkout screen is displayed.


Adjust./oper. checkout [Stop ] Com=0 2015.07.07 12:45

Start
Manual
Excitation Charge voltage up
Phase margin test
adjustment confirmation HOME

Auto-phase gain Level sensor Heating unit


adjustment confirmation confirmation

Back

Heating unit confirmation

2-17
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
2 Press Heating unit confirmation .

The Heating unit confirmation screen is displayed.


Adjust./oper. checkout [Stop ] Com=0 2015.07.07 12:45

<Heating unit confirmation>


Ambient temperature : 10 ( )
Heating unit temp. : 20 ( )
Heating unit status : Deactivated
Execution takes 5 minutes.

Abort Abort
Deactivate Deactivate

Activate Activate
Proc. status: In progress

The heating unit operation state is displayed.


№ Item Contents
1 Ambient temperature The ambient temperature is displayed.
2 Heating unit temperature The temperature of the heating unit is displayed.
Indicates whether the heating unit is activated or
3 Heating unit status
deactivated.

3 When Activate is pressed, the heating unit turns ON.


Heating unit temperature rises.
The heating unit state is displayed as “Activated”.

4 When the Deactivate is pressed, the heating unit turns OFF.

2-18
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
2.4 Test of solenoid valve/pump
●The operation confirmation of solenoid valve and pump is performed.
①Supply valve (MV1) ②Replenishment valve (MV2)
③Recovery valve (MV3) ④Viscosity valve (MV4)
⑤Circulation valve (MV5) ⑥Pressure relief valve (MV6)
⑦Makeup valve (MV7) ⑧Cleaning valve (MV8)
⑨Shutoff valve (MV9) ⑩Pump
⑪Viscometer (MV10) ⑫Exhaust valve (MV11) *1
⑬Gas/liquid valve (MV12) *1 ⑭INK LOCK
⑮MAKEUP LOCK *1:UX-E only
●This test only displays operation status when in operating state.
●The rotating speed of the pump can be changed. (High、Middle、Low)
Operation differs according to state
Mode “Stop” state Other than “stop” state
Service Carries out operation confirmation of
personnel solenoid valve and pump.
Only displays operation state.
maintenance (Multiple solenoid valves can be operated
Operations such as opening
mode simultaneously.)
and closing the solenoid valve
User Carries out operation confirmation of
cannot be performed.
maintenance solenoid valve and pump.
mode (One solenoid valve at a time is operated.)

1 Press Solenoid valve/pump test on the maintenance menu.


For information on changing to the service personnel maintenance mode,
refer to “2.1 Setting of service personnel maintenance mode.”

The solenoid valve /pump test screen is then displayed.


Solenoid v/p test [Stop ] Com=0 2015.07.07 12:45

Open Close Open Close Visco- Oper-


MV1 MV2 Stop
meter ated

MV3 Open Close MV4 Open Close MV11 Open Close

Pump(H)
Open Close Open Close MV12 Open Close
MV5 MV6

Pump(M)

INK UN- LOCK-


MV7 Open Close MV8 Open Close LOCK LOCK- Pump(L)
ED ED

UN- LOCK-
Oper- MAKEUP LOCK-
MV9 Open Close Pump Stop ED
ated LOCK ED
Back
Ink pressure 0.000 (MPa; standard value: 0.250)

2 Press the operation button.


The operation state of the solenoid valve and pump is then displayed.
(Confirm operation by operation sound.)
Open: The solenoid valve is opened. Close: The solenoid valve is closed.
Operation: The pump is operated. Stop : The pump is stopped.
UNLOCKED: It's unlocked. LOCKED: It's locked.
*) Caution:
The pumps and solenoid valve can be operated simultaneously however, operate them
with care when the solenoid valve are turned on while pump is activated because it is not
a steady operation.

2-19
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
2.5 Download
●The function is used for upgrading the program.
●The program on the EZJ126 and EZJ128 boards is downloaded from the USB memory.
●A “USB memory containing system data” is required.
●The function is executed with the IJ printer in “Stop” state.

●Be sure to perform program download when replacing the EZJ126 and EZJ128 boards.
The boards are initialized and the program is updated by downloading. For information
concerning replacement of the EZJ126 and EZJ128 boards, refer to “3.3.1 EZJ126
board” and “3.2.1 EZJ128 board.”

For precautions when replacing the EZJ126 board, refer to “3.3.1 EZJ126 board.”
For precautions when replacing the EZJ128 board, refer to “3.2.1 EZJ128 board.”

●There are two ways to download the program. The effect is the same for either way.
Download method
Method Features Merits
Compares version of the
programs in the IJP memory Only downloads programs of
Mount the USB and
with ones in the USB memory different version, so processing
turn the power on.
and downloads different is completed faster
programs only.
Execute from the You can confirm version of each
Downloads all programs.
download screen. program on the screen.

1 The maintenance menu is displayed.


If Prev. menu Next menu is not displayed on the maintenance menu, set the service
personnel maintenance mode on the login user selection screen.

For information on changing to the service personnel maintenance mode,


refer to “2.1 Setting of service personnel maintenance mode.”

2 Mount “USB memory containing system data”.

USB memory
containing
system data

2-20
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
3 Press Download on the second page of the maintenance menu.
The download screen is then displayed.
Download [Stop ] Com=0 2015.07.07 12:45

Downloaded from(USB memory)


Controller software 03.00
Print controller software M 03.00
Print controller software S 03.00
Print controller ROM data 03.00
CG font data 03.00
Correction data 03.00
Downloaded to(IJP)
Controller software 03.00
Print controller software M 03.00
Print controller software S 03.00
Cancel
Print controller ROM data 03.00
CG font data 03.00 OK
Correction data 03.00
OK
Press [OK] to download.

The version of the programs in the USB memory and board memory are displayed.
If the version of the program in the board memory is older than the one in the USB memory,
be sure to download the newer version.

4 Press OK .
“Please wait” is displayed.
After the completion of the download, the screen returns to the service maintenance screen.

5 After downloading, remove the USB memory.

[Note]
Occasionally, IJ printer does not recognize the USB memory at download procedure, please
make sure following things before download to avoid such problem.
●Use initialized USB memory with FAT16 or FAT32 when copying system data to USB
memory.
●Confirm the USB memory is can be used for download with your machine.
●Please refer the chapter 6.5.21 for troubleshooting.
[Confirm method]
Please confirm that the version of the (USB memory) and (IJP) is identical after download
execution.

2-21
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
2.6 Calibration of Viscometer
2.6.1 Calibration of viscometer
●The calibration of viscometer is to determine the “coefficient” inherent in the equipment.
●Calibrate the viscometer when installing equipment. Normally, calibrating it once is enough.
However, calibrate the viscometer again when changing the ink type, and also calibrate a
new viscometer after replacement.
●Be sure to calibrate the viscometer using new ink.
●Calibrating the viscometer can be done regardless of the ambient temperature.

1 Press Viscometer calibration Start/Continue on the second page of the circulation


control menu of maintenance.
If Viscometer calibration is not displayed on the circulation control menu, set to the service
personnel maintenance mode on the login user selection screen.
For information on changing to the service personnel maintenance mode,
refer to “2.1 Setting of service personnel maintenance mode.”

The viscometer calibration screen is then displayed.


Viscometer calibration [Stop ] Com=0 2015.07.07 12:45

<the previous calibration> < the latest auto replenishment >


Exec.time 2015/07/07 11:30 Exec.time 2009/07/07 12:45
Plunger falling time Plunger falling time
HOME
1st X.XX (sec) 1st X.XX (sec)
2nd X.XX (sec) 2nd X.XX (sec)
3rd X.XX (sec) 3rd X.XX (sec)
4th X.XX (sec) 4th X.XX (sec)
5th X.XX (sec) 5th X.XX (sec)
Average X.XX (sec) Average X.XX (sec)
Operation test
Ink temperature XX ( ) Ink temperature XX ( )
Standard X. XXX (mPa▪s) Standard X. XXX (mPa▪s)
Coefficient XXXX Coefficient XXXX Operation
Ink viscosity XXX test
Ink refilling log 2015/07/07 11:00 Start
After “ink drainage” is completed, perform “ink refilling” of calibration

a new ink first, then click [Start calibration]. Back

Start calibration
2 Press Start calibration.
During the viscometer calibration, the processing state “in progress” is displayed.
*) When the operation confirmation of the viscometer is performed without the calibration,
press Operation test .

[Note] Record the coefficient value or data backup is recommended.


The coefficient value is recorded in the memory on EZJ128 board.
So at the replacement of EZJ128, the calibration with new ink will be
required in case that the value is not recorded nor made a backup.
When the calibration of viscometer is performed continuously for a
number of times, ink temperature within the viscometer increases and
the accuracy of coefficient value is disturbed. Set a limit to the
number of times of performing viscometer calibration to not more
than 3 times. If in any case it needs to be performed more than 3
times leave for about 30 minutes before performing again.

2-22
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
3 The measurement is completed in four minutes, and coefficient (calculated value)
will be displayed.

[Standard value of the viscometer calibration] 1200 to 2200


*The value stated above is a reference. There will be no problem even If the coefficient
value displayed is other than stated above as long as data of Plunger falling time fall
within a similar range.

Viscometer calibration [Stop ] Com=0 2015.07.07 12:45

<the previous calibration> < the current calibration >


Exec.time 2015/07/07 11:30 Exec.time 2009/07/07 12:45
Plunger falling time Plunger falling time
HOME
1st X.XX (sec) 1st X.XX (sec)
2nd X.XX (sec) 2nd X.XX (sec)
3rd X.XX (sec) 3rd X.XX (sec)
4th X.XX (sec) 4th X.XX (sec)
5th X.XX (sec) 5th X.XX (sec)
Coefficient
Average X.XX (sec) Average X.XX (sec)
Ink temperature XX ( ) Ink temperature XX ( )
Standard X. XXX (mPa▪s) Standard X. XXX (mPa▪s)
Coefficient XXXX Coefficient XXXX
Cancel
Ink viscosity XXX

OK
When updating coefficient, press [OK]. OK
Proc. Status: Ended

If “Fault” is displayed for processing state, follow the instructions given in


“4.12 Troubleshooting when Fault Occurs in Viscometer.”

4 Press OK.
If the OK key is pressed when the process status is “normal end”, the coefficient
will be registered, and the circulation control screen will be displayed.

[Note]
The coefficient value will not be registered when Cancel is pressed instead of OK key.

2.6.2 Operation test of viscometer


●This function allows you to check the viscometer operation and measure the current ink
viscosity. Note that this operation test is not to determine the coefficient.
● It is not necessary to use new ink for operation test.

2-23
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
2.7 Circulation system environment setup
●Select whether or not the ink concentration is controlled based on results of the viscosity
measurement.
●Perform these settings at “Stop” state.

Setting items of Circulation system environment setup screen


Item Selection Contents
The ink concentration is controlled by the
dot count control without measurement of
the ink viscosity.
Disable
(Dot count control: Amount of ink which is
Ink concentration control
used for printing and vaporized makeup are
automatically refilled.)
The ink concentration is controlled based on
Enable
results of the viscosity measurement.
Disable Conventional washing.
Careful-Cleaning Stop
carefully washing.
Enable
Reference of (2.19 Careful Cleaning Setup)
Disable It does not stir it.
Automatic stir out of
It perform the stirring in the device every 24
operation Enable
hours
Solvent recovery system Disable Selects enable/disable for Solvent recovery
(UX-E only) Enable system.

1 Press Circulation environment setup Start/Continue on the second page of


the circulation control menu of maintenance.
The Circulation system environment setup screen is then displayed.
Circulation env. setup [Stop ] Com=0 2015.07.07 12:45

Ink type 001 (1067K ) The default


setting is
“Enable.”
Ink concentration control Disable Enable
HOME

Careful-Cleaning Stop Disable Enable


Automatic stir out of operation Disable Enable
Solvent recovery system Disable Enable

Back

*Caution: 1. Under ordinary circumstances, the default setting of “ink concentration control”
is “Enable.”
2. ”Enable” can not be selected for some inks.
In this case, ink concentration is not controlled by the viscometer,
but is controlled by dot count.

2-24
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
2.8 System reset
●Set the set values on the “Printing data”, “User pattern” and “Maintenance” screens to the values of
initial condition.
●Perform this function when the EZJ128 board or the EZJ126 board is replaced in a state allowing
no backup.
●If this function is performed, perform setup and/or adjustment according to the contents described
in “3.2.4 EZJ128 board.” and “3.3.1 EZJ126 board.”
●This setting is carried out with the IJ printer in “Stop” state.

1 The maintenance menu is displayed.


If Prev. menu Next menu is not displayed on the maintenance menu, set the service
personnel maintenance mode on the login user selection screen.
For information on changing to the service personnel maintenance mode,
refer to “2.1 Setting of service personnel maintenance mode.”

2 Press System reset on the second page of the maintenance menu.


The confirmation message is then displayed.
241 ===== System Reset Confirmation =====
The system will be reset.
This function is executed upon replacement of Board
EZJ128 or EZJ126.

OK Cancel

3 Press OK .
“Please wait” is displayed.
After the completion of the system reset, the screen returns to the service maintenance
screen.

〔For work after System reset 〕


Please execute work according to [3.2.1 EZJ128 board (controller board) (12)-(13) of
replacement procedurenotes].
Please execute work according to [3.3.1 EZJ126 board (MPU board) (12)-(13) of
replacement procedure].

2-25
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
2.9 Backup
●Print data and user data are backed up on a USB memory.
●Backup data can be copied on an IJ printer.

●You can select the type of data when copying to the IJ printer.
●The copying method is replacing the content of USB memory as they are (overwrite copy).

Types of copy target data


Types of data Contents
▪ Includes the settings of print contents, print format and print
specifications.
▪ Registered print data is the target of backup; print target data is
Print data
not applicable for backup.
▪ To back up print target data, register them and back up as
registered print data.
Standard Includes standard character patterns in all character sizes.
character
User pattern Includes registered characters in all character sizes.
User environment setup, date/time setup, communication
environment setup, circulation environment settings, system
Unit-specific environment setup, auto phase gain value, fault warning history,
data touch panel coordinate information, display environment setup,
(maintenance excitation setting value, viscosity information, login information,
screen setting Operating time, Ink alarm time, cumulative operating time, print
values, etc.) count, various usage time, logging data (viscosity data, ink
automatic replenishment data, circulation control data, fault
warning history, entry trace data)

Difference between copy target data maintenance modes


Service personnel
User maintenance mode
maintenance mode
Backup Data copy Backup Data copy
Types of data (IJP  (USB memory (IJP  (USB memory
USB memory)  IJP) USB memory)  IJP)
Print data O O O O
Standard
O O O O
character
User pattern O O O O
Unit-specific data O (*1) X O (*2) O (*3)
(*1) Logging data output to binary file only.
(*2) Logging data output to either binary file or text file.
(Refer the chapter 2.20 for Detail of Logging text)
(*3) Can copy when the copy target folder has the same serial number as itself.

Data of multiple IJ printers can be backed up in a single USB memory.


A folder with the product serial number is created in the USB memory.
When copying backup data from the USB memory to the IJ printer, select the folder of the
data is to be copied.
A single USB memory can hold data for up to 100 IJ printers data. However cannot exceed
the capacity of the USB memory.
Use the auxiliary function menu for inserting/removing the USB memory.
Do not frequently insert/remove the USB memory.
When copying standard character pattern, execute the data copy function with the printer in
“Stop” state.

[Note]
Do not use the backup data made by RX model software version before V8.06 to the UX model
with SOP-15-19.

2-26
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
2.10 Unit information
●Displays/changes unit TYPE-FORM, serial No., Icon type, login information and ink type.

Item Contents
TYPE-FORM Displays TYPE-FORM.
Serial No. Displays Serial number.
Icon type Select the Icon type on the display.
Viscosity coefficient Ink viscosity coefficient can be changed.
Ink and makeup usage Whether or not to display a warning when ink and makeup
time limit control usage time limit is up can be set.
Displays board mounting state.
Board information
Model key, language key, Upgrade key, Option board.

●To control ink and makeup usage time limit, set “Ink and makeup usage time limit” to
“Enable” and input the lot number displayed on the bottle label. If used after the 1st day of
the month following “date of manufacture + specified usage limit,” a warning is displayed
every hour. Note that the warning is displayed even if the wrong lot number is input.

●System USB required when change the Icon type.


Icon type Displayed Icon
0 Old type Icon.
1 English subtitle.
2 Japanese subtitle.
3 Non subtitle.
Special type.
4
(Non color with start/stop button)

2-27
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
1 Press Unit information on the maintenance menu.
If in the user maintenance mode, set to the service personnel maintenance mode on the
login user selection screen.
For information on changing to the service personnel maintenance mode,
refer to “2.1 Setting of service personnel maintenance mode.”

The unit information screen is then displayed.

[First page]
Unit information [Stop ] Com=0 2015.07.07 12:45

TYPE-FORM UX-D160W Start


Manual
up

Serial number 99999999 HOME


Icon type 1

Ink viscosity coefficient 9999

Ink type 1067K


Prev. Next
Lot No. Z999999999
list list
Input without hyphens
Makeup type TH-TYPE A
Lot No. Z999999999
Upgrade
Input without hyphens

Expiration date management of ink and makeup disable enable

Back

[Second page]
Unit information [Stop ] Com=0 2015.07.07 12:45

Option board Y Start


Manual
Upgrade-key - / - / - up

Language-key - HOME
Model-key Y
CG type EZJ128 xxxxxxx EZJ126 xxxxxxx
IJP-LAN unit -

EZJ126 Board Swing Status 2047(11bit) Prev. Next


list list
Language-key number 99999999 Y

Upgrade number 1 R123456


2 R123456
3 R123456

Back

<Display information (Except language key)> <Display information (Language key)>


Y:Normal J:Language key B(All language)Installed
N:Invalid language key Y:Language key A(Expect Japanese) Installed
-:Not installed N:Language key installed (Different serial number)
-:Not installed or invalid language key
A:Indirect export machine

2-28
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
2.11 Handling of the warning “Product Speed Matching Error”, etc.
(user environment setup)
●Displays items of user environment setup screen that can be set in the service personnel
maintenance mode.

Items that can be set in the service personnel maintenance mode (user environment setup
screen)
№ Item Setting value Contents
Warning is not displayed even if warning
Warning “Product Disable
conditions are met.
1 Speed Matching
Warning is displayed when warning
Error” Enable
conditions are met.
Arabic pattern Method 1 Select one of two pattern designs for Arabic
2
variation Method 2 number “2”.
Minimum character Sets input range for character height of print
3 Set 0 to 50
height value specifications screen.
Target sensor is off
Repeat print does
during target sensor not stop
filtering
Disable
Sensor chattering
happens during Normal printing
Signal detection in
target sensor filtering
4 target sensor
Target sensor is off
filtering Repeat print stop
during target sensor
filtering
Enable
Sensor chattering
Improper Sensor
happens during
Position fault occur
target sensor filtering
Print overlap fault Disable Print Overlap Fault” is detected
5
check Enable “Print Overlap Fault” is not detected in error.
Disable Print items not add when online mode.
Add items online
6 24 items Up to 24 print items add when online mode.
mode
100 items Up to 100 print items add when online mode.
Continue message Continue message print function not
Disable
print activated.
7
SOP15-20
Enable Continue message print function activated.
installed
Start item number for Continue message
Start
print function.
8 Message number
End item number for Continue message print
End
function.
Last data print Normal Next print message display on the screen.
9
display. Last print Last printed message display on the screen.

[ Caution ]:
Even if a condition for the warning happens and the print disordered, the warning will not be
displayed when the value is set to “disable”.

2-29
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Arabic number “2” print CG example (characters size in figure is “12 x 16”)

< Method 1 > < Method 2 >

●You can enhance printing quality by increasing the “character height” setting value and
decreasing distance between printing head and print object, rather than decreasing the
“character height” setting value and increasing distance between printing head and print
object.
Setting the minimum value of “character height” prevents deterioration of printing quality.

●Add items online mode


(1). Function Summary
In the second page of “User Environment Setup” screen, which is the specific screen of
“Service Personnel Maintenance Mode”, the new item of “Add items in online mode” is created.
There will be selections of “Disable”, “24 items” and “100 items”. When the number of print
items currently set is short, the print items will be automatically added.
No. Timing when the print items are added automatically.
1 When the transition from off-line to on-line is made manually.
2 When the transition from off-line to on-line is made by external communication.
3 When the registered print data is recalled by external communication or by external
signal.

(2). Add-Items Process


The print items will be added, “Column” by “Column”, using the format of the last column,
such as the number of lines and the character size. If there be created the extra “Column(s)”
and the print item(s) can’t be added in units of “Column”, the print item of the single line, 5x8
(5x7) character size will be added. Please see below the examples when the print items are
added automatically.

[Example 1]
The print items are added in units of “Column” up to the numbers specified. (24 items are set.)
Before Change After Change
3Lines/1Column (3 items) 3Lines/8Columns (24 items)

Column1 Column1 Column8


5x5 5x5 … 5x5
5x8 5x8 … 5x8
7x10 7x10 … 7x10

2-30
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
[Example 2]
The print items are “NOT” added in units of “Column” up to the numbers specified. (24 items are set.)
Before Change After Change
1Line/1Column + 3Lines/1Column 1Line/1Column + 3Lines/7Columns + 1Line/2Columns
(4 items) (24 items)

Column1 Column2 Column1 Column2 Column8 Column9 Column10


5x5 5x5 … 5x5
5x8 5x8 … 5x8
12x16 7x10 12x16 7x10 … 7x10 5x8 5x8

[Note] The extra items are added as two “Columns”


of a single line, 5x8 (5x7) character size.

(3) Cautions
Functional Cautions
Using this new function, the print item(s) is/are added as extra print item(s) at the last column(s) of
single-line, 5x8 (5x7) character size. When the print start signal is inputted, the error “Blank Print
Items” will occur. If that happens, input space in the last print item(s).
When this function is used, please study adequately before printing, the print item format, such as
the number of lines, character size.

The error “Blank Print Items” will


occur when there is no character
inputted at the last print item(s).
Column1 Column2 Column8 Column9 Column10
5x8 … 5x8
5x8 … 5x8
12x16 7x10 … 7x10 5x8 5x8

Performance Cautions
When this function is used, please pay attention to those described below, the influence to
performance.
No. Function Name Influence To Performance
Since the print data is re-structured by adding the items, if the print start signal
Online is inputted right after the data transfer, the error “Print data changeover in
1
Transmission progress” will occur. Please input the print start signal 400ms after the data is
transferred.
The response performance will change whether this function is used or not.
However, if the number of registered print items which are recalled is more
than the number set by “Add items in online mode”, its response performance
will be the same as that when “Disable” is set.
Print Data Recall [When this function is used.]
2
Transmission - Data recall less than or equal to 24 items: 15ms
- Data recall more than or equal to 25 items: 40ms
[When this function is “NOT” used.]
- Data recall less than or equal to 24 items: 5ms
- Data recall more than or equal to 25 items: 30ms

2-31
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
1 Press User environment setup on the maintenance menu.
If in the user maintenance mode, set to the service personnel maintenance mode on the
login user selection screen.
For information on changing to the service personnel maintenance mode,
refer to “2.1 Setting of service personnel maintenance mode.”

The user environment setup screen is then displayed.

[First page]
User environment setup [Stop ] Com=0 2015.07.07 12:45

Repeat print sensor mode signal ON OFF-ON transition Start


Manual
up
Change Character orientation Reverse direction printing
Change mode OFF=forward(ABC) HOME

Reverse print right-justified left-justified

Print signal type print. complete print.-in-progress


Prev. Next
Print data changeover Disable Enable set- set-
tings tings
Char. Size menu 1 5x8 5x7
Char. Size menu 2 9x8 9x7
Excitation V-ref. warning Disable Enable
Product speed matching error Disable Enable

Back

[Second page]
User environment setup [Stop ] Com=0 2015.07.07 12:45

Print characters one by one Disable Enable Start


Manual
up

HOME

QR Code printing 180-degree rotation Normal

Prev. Next
set- set-
tings tings

Back

2-32
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
[Third page]
User environment setup [Stop ] Com=0 2015.07.07 12:45

Start
Arabic pattern variation method1 method2 Manual
up
Minimum character height 00 (0-50)
HOME

Signal detection in target sensor filtering Disable Enable

Print Overlap Fault Check Disable Enable Prev. Next


set- set-
Add items in online mode Disable Enable tings tings

Layout display Normal Last printing

Restriction of Character width setting Disable Enable

Back

2-33
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
2.12 Language registration
●This function is to register screen languages.
●Register display language for the IJ printer from the “USB memory containing system data”.
●Keyboard type for character input can be selected by input mode.
Input mode
Input mode Contents
Default Accent characters, Greek, Russian and Arabic characters
Local language Chinese character, dedicated characters for date, katakana
●If “Japanese” or “Simple Chinese” is registered for “language 1,” it becomes the setting for
“local language.” When selecting “local language,” Chinese character supported by the
language registered as “language 1” can be input.

1 Insert the “USB memory containing system data”.

2 Press Select language at auxiliary functions.


The language selection screen is then displayed.

If Change language is not displayed, set to service personnel maintenance mode on the login
user selection screen.
For information on changing to the service personnel maintenance mode,
refer to “2.1 Setting of service personnel maintenance mode.”

Select language [Stop ] Com=0 2015.07.07 12:45

Current language English 01.00

Registered language
Language1 English 01.00 Change language
Language2 German 01.00 Change language

Input mode Default Local Language

English
Prev. Next
German list list
French
OK

Cancel

Back

Selects display language from registered Registers selected language.


languages.

3 Press Change language and select the desired language.


Selected language is then registered in place of already registered language.
4 Select language from registered languages.
Display language is then changed.
5 Select input mode.
6 Press OK.

2-34
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
[Note]
●Do not leave from the printer until download procedure is complete then confirm the select
language screen display.
The download has succeeded when select language screen redisplay.
Download had not succeeded when the select language screen did not redisplay or power failure
happened during download procedure.
In such case refer the troubleshoot 6.5.22.

●Confirm the all message in following case and remake the message when the print result is not
properly.

Before After
Languege1 Input mode Languege1 Input mode
1 English, Thai, Local language Japanese Local language
2 Vietnamese, Simple Traditional Chinese Local language
3 Chinese Korean Local language
4 Japanese Local language English, Thai, Local language
Vietnamese, Simple
Chinese
5 Traditional Chinese Local language
6 Korean Local language
7 Traditional Chinese Local language English, Thai, Local language
Vietnamese, Simple
Chinese
8 Japanese Local language
9 Korean Local language
10 Korean Local language English, Thai, Local language
Vietnamese, Simple
Chinese
11 Japanese Local language
12 Traditional Chinese Local language

●The text [Unknown print data] will display when call the message due to exchange Language1 or
Input mode.

2-35
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
2.13 Fault / Warning log management code
●This function displayed code number in the Fault/Warning log screen.
Fault/Warning Log Code Table
Code Code
Message name Message name
No. No.
001 Ink Low Fault 051 Detector Position Improper
002 Main Ink Tank Too Full 052 Target Sensor Timer Out
003 Deflection Voltage Fault 053 Target Spacing Too Close
004 Ink Replenishment Time-out 054 Print Data Changeover In Progress S
005 Ink Drop Charge Too Low 055 Ink Shelf Life Information
006 SYSTEM OPERATION ERROR C 056 Blank Print Items
007 SYSTEM OPERATION ERROR M 057 Excessive Format Count
008 SYSTEM OPERATION ERROR S 058 Print Data Changeover In Progress M
009 Deflection Voltage Leakage 059 Print Data Changeover In Progress V
010 Makeup Replenishment Time-out 060 Communication Buffer Fault
011 Makeup Low Fault 061 Makeup Shelf Life Information
012 Ink Heating Unit Temperature Too High 062 Internal Communication Error C
013 Multi DC Power Supply Fan Fault 063 Internal Communication Error M
014 Charge Voltage Too Low 064 Continue Message Print Setting Invalid
015 Charge Voltage Fault 065 Excitation V-ref. Review
016 No Ink Drop Charge 066 Viscosity Reading Instable
017 Ink Heating Unit Temperature Sensor Fault 067 Viscosity Readings Out of Range
018 Memory Fault C 068 Ink Viscosity High
019 Memory Fault OP 069 Ink Viscosity Low
020 Memory Fault M 070
021 Ink Drop Charge Error 071 Battery Low M
022 Internal Communication Error S 072 Calendar Content Inaccurate
023 SYSTEM OPERATION ERROR S 073 Ink expiration time management
024 Ink Heating Unit Over Current 074 Special Output Response Error
025 Ambient Temperature Sensor Fault 075 External Communication Error 032
026 Print Controller Cooling Fan Fault 076 External Communication Error 033
027 Print Data Changeover Error C 077 External Communication Error 034
028 Print Data Changeover Error M 078 External Communication Error 035
029 Special Output Response Fault 079 Excitation V-ref. Char. Height Review
030 Memory Fault S 080 Excitation V-ref. Review 2
031 Pump Motor Fault 081 Ink Low Warning
032 Inside Temperature Sensor Fault 082 Makeup Low Warning
033 083 Ink Shelf Life Expired
034 Ink Heating Unit Temperature Low 084 Ambient Temperature Too High
035 Model-key Fault 085 Ambient Temperature Too Low
036 086
037 Language-key Fault 087 Ink Pressure High
038 Free Layout Printing Failure 088 Battery Low C
039 No Correct Format 089 External Signal Error 001
040 External Communication Error NNN 090 External Signal Error 002
041 External Signal Error NNN 091 External Signal Error 003
042 Ink Drop Charge Too High 092 External Signal Error 004
043 Barcode Short On Numbers 093 Ink Pressure Low
044 Shutdown Fault 094 Ink Viscosity High Displayed
045 Count Overflow 095 Product Speed Matching Error
046 Invalid Data Change Timing 096 Ink Viscosity Low Displayed
047 Invalid Count Data Change Timing 097 External Communication Error 001
048 Invalid Print Start Timing 098 External Communication Error 002
049 Print Overlap Fault 099 External Communication Error 003
050 Print Head Cover Open 100 External Communication Error 004

2-36
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Code Code
Message name Message name
No. No.
101 External Communication Error 005
102 External Communication Error 006 155 Parts Life Expired
103 External Communication Error 007 156 Parts Life Expired
104 External Communication Error 008
105 External Communication Error 009 161 Ink Level Sensor Broken 2
106 External Communication Error 010 162 Makeup Level Sensor Broken 2
107 External Communication Error 011 163 Ink Low Warning 2
108 External Communication Error 012 164 Makeup Low Warning 2
109 External Communication Error 013 165 Makeup Level Sensor Broken 4
110 External Communication Error 014
111 External Communication Error 015 176 No Ink Viscosity Coefficient
112 External Communication Error 016
113 External Communication Error 017 187 Ink Temperature Correction Notice
114 External Communication Error 018
115 External Communication Error 019 190 Invalid Engine Section Software
116 External Communication Error 020
117 External Communication Error 021 194 Unknown Print Data
118 External Communication Error 022
119 External Communication Error 023 200 No Ink Concentration Control
120 External Communication Error 024 201 Print Data/ Settings Notice
121 External Communication Error 025
122 External Communication Error 026 209 Power Restoration Procedure
123 External Communication Error 027 210 USB Memory Error
124 External Communication Error 028
125 External Communication Error 029 215 Upgrade-key Failure
126 External Communication Error 030 216 Option Circuit Board Failure
127 External Communication Error 031
221 Upgrade-key Fault
129 Model-key Failure
130 Language-key Failure 240 IJP LAN UNIT Error
131 Upgrade-key Fault
243 Ink Low Fault 2
135 Circulation system cooling Fan Fault 244 Makeup Low Fault 2
136 Inside Temperature Too High 245 Ink Level Sensor Broken 1
246 Makeup Level Sensor Broken 1

251 Circulation Route Pressure Is High


151 RFID Reader Failure
254 Ink Level Sensor Broken 3
255 Makeup Level Sensor Broken 3

2-37
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
2.14 Software option setup
2.14.1 Software option setup for UX-D,E
●Use this function when setting up software options to IJ printer.
● In order to set up options, EZJ129 board / EZJ130 board and a memory card (IJP
system-data is stored) are required.
For information on installing EZJ130 board, refer to “3.3.12 EZJ130 board (Software
option control board)”.
For information on installing EZJ129 board, refer to “3.3.13 EZJ129 board (Software
option terminal board)”.
● Perform this function when the IJ printer is in a “Stop” state.

1 Turn off the power and install the EZJ129 board / EZJ130 board.

2 Turn on the power.

3 Insert the USB memory which IJP system-data is stored.

4 Press Option setup at the second page of the service maintenance work
screen.
If Prev. menu Next menu is not displayed on the maintenance menu, set the service
personnel maintenance mode on the login user selection screen.
For information on changing to the service personnel maintenance mode,
refer to “2.1 Setting of service personnel maintenance mode.”

When a USB memory which IJP system-data is stored is not set, Option setup
button is not displayed.

Maintenance menu [Stop ] Com=0 2015.07.07 12:45

Start
Manual
System up

environment setup HOME

Download

Option setup

System reset

Back

Option setup

2-38
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
5 Change the option to set up to “Enable”.

Option setup [Stop ] Com=0 2015.07.07 12:45

04 Special communication A Disable Enable

05 External signal A Disable Enable

08 Barcode reader connection Disable Enable HOME

13 LAN communication Disable Enable

07 MOBA Disable Enable


15 Special function none

09 Line spacing expansion Disable Enable

17 High-speed print 18x24 Disable Enable


10 Secondary port Disable Enable

Back

none
17:Herta
18:Smile print control
19:Speed matching enhanced
20:Continue message print
21:Last printing
22:Last day of month
24:Meter count
Cancel
26: Calendar time auto update

6 Press Back or HOME.


After the completion of the setup, the screen returns to the service maintenance
screen.

7 After the completion of setup, remove the USB memory.

8 Check the function of the software option.

2.14.2 Standard communication option setup for UX-B


●Refer to “3.3.7 EZJ127 board (I/O board); [Procedure to add the option for UX-B (change to
EZJ127A board)]”.

2-39
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
2.15 Upgrade option setup for UX-D
● Functional upgrade is available with inserting upgrade key.
● The possible steps for upgrade is depending on the number of upgrade-key.
< Available upgrade steps >
Number of
Upgrade step
Upgrade-Key
0 0
1 Up to 4 steps

●There are five upgrade groups. For the upgrade specification of each group & step, refer to
the following table.
<Upgrade group and specification of each step>
Specification of each upgrade step
Group Item
Step_0 Step_1 Step_2
1-line f/2 f/1 f/1
2-line f/2 f/1.286 f/1
1 Ink drop use 3-line f/2 f/1.47 f/1
4-line f/3 f/1.786 f/1
5,6-line f/3
Message length (Characters) 240 1000
2
Message storage capacity 300 Up to 2,000
Number of calendar 3 8
Shift code - Available
3 Time count - Available
Calendar substitution 48 99
Number of counter 3 8

[Notice]
(1) Set the upgrade option setup before creating messages, etc. at the installation procedure.
(2) If the upgrade option setup step is degraded (i.e from “4 lines” to “3 lines”), “System reset
confirmation” message appears and selection of following (a) or (b) are required.
(a) If the stored message has the function or setting which does not supported after
degraded specification, press <Enter> for System reset. All stored messages are
cleared.
(b) If the stored message does not have the function or setting which does not supported
after degraded specification, press <Close>. All stored messages are remained.
(*) In case of (b), if the stored message is not supported after degraded specification,
the message cannot be selected. The message name is displayed with red.

2-40
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
[Procedure to upgrade function using upgrade key for UX-D]
1 Turn off the power and install the upgrade-keys on EZJ126 board.

2 Turn on the power.

3 Press Upgrade function setup at the second page of the service maintenance
work screen.
If Prev. menu Next menu is not displayed on the maintenance menu, set the Upgrade
password “UGRS” on the login user selection screen.
For information on changing to the Upgrade mode with Upgrade password
“UGRS”, refer to “2.1 Setting of service personnel maintenance mode.”

Upgrade screen is displayed.


Upgrade function setup [Stop ] Warning Com=0 2015.07.07 12:45

HOME
Particle use 1 line f/2 f/1 f/1
2 line f/2 f/1.286 f/1
3 line f/2 f/1.47 f/1
4 line f/3 f/1.786 f/1
5,6 line f/3 f/3 f/3

Max registers 300 300-2000


Max printing columns 240 1000

Calendar items 3 8
Shift code, Time count NOT supported supported Cancel
Replacement items 48 99
Count items 3 8

Number of upgrades available : 4 Upgrade code OK


Number of upgrades used :0
QS202

4 Select the items to upgrade then press OK.


Upgrade function setup [Stop ] Warning Com=0 2015.07.07 12:45

HOME
Particle use 1 line f/2 f/1 f/1
2 line f/2 f/1.286 f/1
3 line f/2 f/1.47 f/1
4 line f/3 f/1.786 f/1
5,6 line f/3 f/3 f/3

Max registers 300 300-2000


Max printing columns 240 1000

Calendar items 3 8
Shift code, Time count NOT supported supported Cancel
Replacement items 48 99
Count items 3 8

Number of upgrades available : 4 Upgrade code OK


Number of upgrades used : 4 HR208

5 Exit the maintenance screen then cancel the Upgrade password by using
password protection.

2-41
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
2.16 Time of preparing for printing (UX-D,E only)
●Set time between after the print target detection signal is input and printing.
Time between after print target detection signal is input and printing
Model Set Value Time of preparing
UX-B Standard only Approx. 7ms
UX-D,E Standard Approx. 7ms
Short Approx. 3ms
●Please note when “Short” is set and continuous printing was performed at frequent intervals,

drop in printing quality may occur. Print quality is maintained if print standby time is saved.

[Standard] ON
Print target sensor signal OFF
Approx.7ms Approx.7ms

Printing operation Printing Printing

[Short] ON
Print target sensor signal OFF
Approx.3ms Approx.3ms

Printing operation Printing Printing

[Caution]
●When “Short” mode is set and continuous printing was performed at frequent intervals, drop in
printing quality may occur.
●IJ printer applies charge signal at the timing of when ink droplets separate from an orifice to
charge ink droplets, and to maintain print quality, check of separation timing of these ink
droplets is performed.
●In “Standard“ mode, check of separation timing of ink droplets is performed between when
print target sensor signal is input and print signal is output. On the other hand, in “Short”
mode, to shorten the length of print preparation time, it does not perform check of separation
timing of these ink droplets. However, in ”Short” mode and when there is any time of over
640ms with no printing performed, the check is performed, and even “Short” mode is set, print
quality is maintained as long as appropriate printing standby time is saved.
●Separation timing of ink droplets changes depending on the ambient temperature or the ink
viscosity status. The separation timing of ink droplets changes in short time especially during
ink heating at low temperature, and when short mode is setup under such condition, it has a
higher chances that drop of ink print quality may occur. Before using this function, make sure
to perform checking under product line conditions and ensure it corresponds to usage
condition.
●There is a limitation on the message strings when “Short” mode is set.
Print method Print text with Calendar Limit strings
Single - -
Interlaced/Mixed No -
Yes Less than 40 characters in Total.
(Ex) 25 character in Total.
st
1 line: 2011/09/06 ABC [15 Char.]
nd
2 line: 2011/0910 [10 Char.]
●When use more than the limit number of characters,
[Print data Changeover in progress V] error can be happen or [Target spacing too close]
error can happen with encoder.

2-42
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Print specifications screen

Print specifications [Stop ] Com=0 2015.07.07 12:45

1st screen 2nd screen 3rd screen Start


Manual
up
Product speed matching None Encoder
HOME
Pulse rate div. Factor 001 (1/1~1/999 Enter denominator.)

Line speed 00000 [m/min.] Input ‘0’ if unknown


Time of preparing for printing
Time of preparing for printing Standard Short Edit
Repeat print message
Repeat count 0000 (0: none,1~9998,9999:Continuous) Print
Displayed when in
format Service personnel
ABC ABC
Change unit
Mode.
Repeat intervals 99999 (0~99999) SC
Back

2-43
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
2.17 Touch screen setup
● Touch screen setup items with service mode as following.

Items of Touch screen setup with service mode


№ Item Setting Contents
To the left Cursor move to right to left when input the text.
1 Arabic input mode
To the right Cursor move to left to right when input the text.
Method 1 Status background color pattern is A type.
2 Status color
Method 2 Status background color pattern is B type.
Standby/Ready Disable No button for Standby and Ready mode switching.
3
change button Enable Display the button for Standby and Ready switching.

● Status background color can be selectable by status color.


Status color pattern list
Status background color IJP Status Status background
White : Stop
Green : Standby/Starting/Ink heating/Stopping/
Pattern A Service/Drop adjust/Cover open
Blue : Ready
Red : Fault
White : Stop
Right blue : Standby/Starting/Ink heating/Stopping/
Pattern B Service/Drop adjust/Cover open
Green : Ready
Red : Fault

● Keyboard touch can be reduce when [Standby/Ready change button setting to Enable.

1 Press Touch screen setup at the service maintenance work screen.

Touch screen setup [Stop ] Warning Com=0 2009.07.07 12:45

Display OFF in 3 min.


Keyboard layout ABC QWERTY
ICON Display Disable Enable
Clock display format YYYY.MM.DD
Confirmation window for Manual Control Menu Display Nondisplay
Arabic input method to the left to the right

Status Color Method1 Method2


Standby/Ready Change Button Disable Enable

Back

2-44
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
2.18 Expiration date management of ink and makeup
1.Overview
When the ink or makeup bottle which passed the expiration date were to be opened for
use, or when the ink or makeup passed estimated replacement time after opening or
recommended expiration date (※), fault of “Ink Shelf Life Information” or “Makeup Shelf Life
Information” is output to encourage the customer to replace the ink or makeup using
ink bottle or makeup bottle which is unopened and within expiration date.
(※)
recommended expiration date・・・a value calculated from addition of year and month of
manufacture of ink or makeup, expiration date and estimated replacement time
after opening. Estimated replacement time is uniformly 6 months as for this specification.

2.Manner of operation
(1) Setup of expiration date management
Open the Unit information screen on Maintenance menu in service personnel
maintenance mode. If the setup item on the screen “Expiration date management of ink
and makeup” is set to “Enable”, expiration date management of ink and makeup is
performed. If set to “Disable”, expiration date management of ink and makeup is not
performed. Default is set to “Disable”.

Unit information [Stop ] Com=0 2015.07.07 12:45

TYPE-FORM UX-D160W Start


Manual
up

Serial number 99999999 HOME

Ink viscosity coefficient 9999

Ink type 1067K


Prev. Next
Lot No. Z999999999
list list
Input without hyphens
Makeup type TH-TYPE A

Shown only when Lot No. Z999999999 Upgrade Service personnel


“Expiration date Input without hyphens
mode only
management of ink
and makeup is set to Expiration date
Expiration date management of ink and makeup disable enable management of ink
“Enable” and makeup

Back

Example of “Unit information screen”

2-45
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
(2) Input lot number
Lot number (example: G01D-1) is indicated on the label of ink or makeup.
By inputting this lot number on Unit information screen, year and month of manufacture of
Ink or makeup is calculated within IJP, and makes it possible to manage the expiration
date. Input the lot number without hyphen. At input of lot number, fault is output under
conditions as below. (Refer to (4) Fault in terms of contents)

No. Fault output condition at lot number input


1 Lot number is different
2 Year and month of manufacture of ink or makeup is future
date
3 The expiration date has already passed at the time of lot
number input

(3) Fault output starting date (Refer to (4) Fault in terms of contents)
(a) When lot number was input in user maintenance mode
->Output fault by using recommended expiration date

(Ex.)1069K ; Year and month of manufacture : 2014/07


・Expiration date of 1069K :24 months
・Estimated replacement time after opening :6 months
Therefore, fault output starting date is
30 months from 2014/07=The last day of 2017/01→ [2017/02/01]

Year and month


of manufacture of
Ink Start fault output
2014/07
Fault is NOT output 2017/02/01 Fault continues to output until lot
for 30 months+α
number of new inkbottle is input

(b) When lot number was input in service personnel maintenance mode
->Input date of lot number + Estimated time to replace is set as fault output starting
date. Expiration year and date of ink and makeup is ignored.

(Ex.)JP-K69 ; Year and month of manufacture : 2014/11


Lot number input date: 2014 /12/15
・Expiration date of JP-K69:24months
These will be ignored
・Year and month of manufacture:2014/11
・Estimated replacement time after opening:6months
Therefore, fault output starting date is
6 months from 2014/12/15 is 2015/06/15→[2015/06/16]

Lot number
input date Start fault output
2014/12 Fault is NOT output Fault continues to output until lot
2015/06/16
for 6 months number of new inkbottle is input

2-46
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
(4) Fault
(a) Fault occurrence condition
When Expiration date management for ink and makeup is set to Enable, the fault of “Ink
Shelf Life Information” or “Makeup Shelf Life Information” is output under conditions
below.

№ Fault output condition


1 At startup, [Present ≧ Fault output starting date]
2 Every hour 1 minute after the hour, [Present ≧ Fault output starting
date]
3 Fulfill the fault occurrence condition of (2) Input lot number)

(b) [Guidance of ink shelf life] messages

Ink Shelf Text Replacement of ink is recommended.


Life Cause 1. It is estimated time to replace ink.
Information 2. Ink lot number is different.
Solution 1. Use ink within its expiration date at replacement.
2. Confirm ink lot number on unit information screen.
3. Contact your local distributor.
Button Close

(c) [Guidance of makeup shelf life] messages

Makeup Text Replacement of makeup is recommended.


Shelf Life Cause 1. It is estimated time to replace makeup.
Information 2. Makeup lot number is different.
Solution 1. Use makeup within its expiration date at replacement.
2. Confirm makeup lot number on unit information screen.
3. Contact your local distributor.
Button Close

2-47
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
2.19 Careful Cleaning Setup
۰This is the function to clean the printer carefully before the weekend, such as 2-3 day shutdown
period. This careful cleaning uses more amount of makeup than the normal cleaning.
۰This function can be also used when requested by the customer to clean the nozzle after the
printer was left unattended for a long time. Please obtain the customer’s understanding before
executing this function.
۰Please refer to the Table below for the differences between Normal Cleaning and Careful
Cleaning.

No. ITEM Normal Cleaning Careful Cleaning


1 Makeup to be used Approx. 5ml Approx. 10ml
2 Shutdown processing time Approx. 4 minutes Approx. 5 minutes
3 Decrease of viscosity index Approx. ”3” Approx. ”6”

2.19.1 Careful Cleaning - Setup Procedure


1 The maintenance menu is displayed.
If Prev. menu Next menu is not displayed on the maintenance menu, set the service
personnel maintenance mode on the login user selection screen.
For information on changing to the service personnel maintenance mode,
refer to “2.1 Setting of service personnel maintenance mode.”

2 Press Circulation environment setup Start/Continue on the second page of


the circulation control menu of maintenance.
Set “Careful-Cleaning Stop” to Disable. (Default setting: Enable)

3 Setup confirmation for “Confirmation window for Manual Control Menu”


Go to “Environment setup menu” screen and press Touch screen setup. Then, press
Display of “Confirmation window for Manual Control Menu”.
If Nondisplay is selected, the shutdown process of “Careful cleaning” is NOT available.

2.19.2 Instruction Manual for “Careful Cleaning”


When this function of “Careful-Cleaning Stop” is set to Enable, please hand out to the customer 2-
page instruction of “Hitachi IJP - Model UX Careful Cleaning Instruction Manual” which is attached
herewith and provide an explanation of “Operation and Precautions” properly.

2-48
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Hitachi IJP - Model UX
Careful Cleaning Instruction Manual
This is the function to clean the nozzle carefully when shutting down IJP.
Please read the instructions below and execute “Careful cleaning” function.

1. Operation
1.1 Operation procedures of “Careful cleaning” shutdown process
(1) Press Shutdown button at top right of the screen and [Shutdown Process Confirmation]
message will appear, as shown in bottom half of the figure below. *1

(1)

(2)

(2) Press Careful cleaning button.


The regular shutdown process with nozzle cleaning is executed by pressing OK
button or STOP*2 button.
*1 If [Shutdown Process Confirmation] message does not appear, go to Item 1.2 below.
*2 STOP button will only show up with Model UX-D,E.

1.2 Confirmation of setup items for Confirmation message display of Control menu
In case that even the Shutdown button at top right is pressed but [Shutdown Process
Confirmation] message does not appear, go to “Environment setup menu” screen and press
Touch screen setup. Then, press Display of “Confirmation window for Manual Control Menu”.
If Nondisplay is selected, the shutdown process of “Careful cleaning” is NOT available.

2-49
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
2. Precautions
The ink concentration will get lower compared to that of the regular shutdown process since the
shutdown process of “Careful cleaning” will use extra amount of makeup. (It will consume about the
double amount of makeup of the regular shutdown process. Please pay extra attention as stated
below.

(1) When the shutdown process of “Careful cleaning” is conducted, at the next start-up, please make
actual prints and check the print quality before use.
When the print quality is degraded, put IJP in a standby mode with ejecting ink, and use IJP after
the print quality is recovered. By ejecting ink, the ink concentration is automatically adjusted.
(2) At IJP start-up after the shutdown process of “Careful cleaning” is conducted, if IJP shutdown is
conducted repeatedly right after the start-up, the ink concentration will become lower gradually by
the automatic nozzle cleaning of shutdown process.
For stable IJP operation, when IJP is started, please run IJP with ejecting ink for a certain period of
time. By this IJP operation, the ink concentration will be automatically adjusted and its viscosity will
recover to the initial state. The required run time will depend on the operation temperature and the
ink type. Please refer to the chart below. *1 *2

[MEK-based or Acetone-based Ink] [Ethanol-based Ink]


10 10
Required Run Time

8 8
Operating Hours

Operating Hours

Required Run Time 6


6

4 4

2 2

Operating Temperature (deg C) Operating Temperature (deg C)

*1 When MEK-based ink is used at 20 deg C, run IJP with ejecting ink for 2 hours. The
required run time is approximately twice as many hours as that of the regular shutdown
process.
*2 The makeup supplied by automatic nozzle cleaning will evaporate by itself during run
operation with ejecting ink, the ink will return to initial state.

2-50
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
2.20 Logging data
- Log the operating conditions to investigate the fault and warning condition.
- Log files are copied to the below holder when backup function is performed in the Service
personnel maintenance mode.
List of Log files
No. File name Contents Logging timing
1 ALARM.TXT Fault and warning log When Fault or Warning happens.
2 AUTOSPLY.TXT Ink and makeup When ink and makeup are
replenishment data replenished automatically.
(Each 30 min.)
3 INKVISCO.TXT Viscosity control When ink and makeup are
replenished automatically.
(Each 30 min.)
4 SEQUENCE.TXT Circulation system control When circulation system control
sequence is done.
- Up to 480 logging data can be recorded. If the number of logging data exceeds 480, the oldest
data is erased.

1 Contents of each log file


The following examples show the image of the logging data (text file) is pasted to Microsoft Excel
format.

(1) Fault and warning log (ALARM.TXT)


[Example]
№ Date Time Code Message Info1 Info2 Info3 Info4
1 2011/7/7 7:05:29 22 Internal Communication Error S 0x0004 0x0000 0 0
2 2011/7/7 7:06:56 176 Viscometer not Calibrated 0x0000 0x0000 0 0
3 2011/7/7 8:06:56 88 Battery Low 0x0000 0x0000 0 0
4 2011/7/7 9:07:45 17 Heating Unit Sensor Fault 0x0002 0x0000 32 12
5 2011/7/7 10:12:04 1 Ink Low Fault 0x0000 0x0000 0 0
6 2011/7/7 11:37:20 2 Main Ink Tank Too Full 0x0000 0x0000 0 0
7 2011/7/7 12:07:22 50 Cover Open 0x0000 0x0000 0 0
8 2011/7/7 12:14:45 209 Storage Media Error 0x0000 0x0000 0 0

- Code: Log management code of each Fault and Warning.


(Refer to the 2.13 Fault / Warning log management code)
- Info1 to 4: Internal management code to specify the cause of alarm

2-51
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
(2) Automatic ink replenishment data (AUTOSPLY.TXT)
[Example]
Initial level Ink Makeup ink Ink
(High- replen ishment replenishment replenishment

Control speed Ambient Viscometer Ink Cumulative (for dot (to an initial (to an initial
№ Date Start time sequence machine) Mode temperature temperature Pressure print count Dot count count) level) level) Finish time
1 2011/7/7 0:02:49 High 1 2 26 23 0.297 0 0 0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00 0:02:49
2 2011/7/7 0:03:59 Norm. 1 3 26 23 0.257 0 0 0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00 0:03:59
3 2011/7/7 0:04:36 Norm. - B 26 23 0.256 17 1292 0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00 0:04:36
4 2011/7/7 0:07:43 Norm. - 2 26 23 0.299 24 214 0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00 0:07:43
5 2011/7/7 0:11:11 Low 1 3 26 23 0.298 43 7572 0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00 0:11:11
6 2011/7/7 0:22:33 Norm. - B 26 23 0.256 58 10212 0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00 0:22:33
7 2011/7/7 0:30:55 Norm. - 2 26 23 0.299 60 0 0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00 0:30:55
8 2011/7/7 0:31:22 Norm. - G 26 25 0.249 65 5655 0:00:00 TimeOver 0:00:00 0:31:52

- Control sequence
Norm. : Normal ink concentration
Low : Performing the reducing concentration control due to the high ink concentration
High : Performing the increasing concentration control due to the low ink concentration
- Initial level (High-speed machine)
The position of initial level at the high-speed machine (1 to 3) (0: At the other model)
- Mode
Result of Automatic ink replenishment (Refer to the next page (3).)
- Ambient temperature
Ambient temperature measured by the sensor in the neck of Printhead
- Viscometer temperature
Ink temperature measured by the sensor in the viscometer
- Dot count
The number of printed ink dots during the each ink replenishment interval
- Ink replenishment (for dot count)
Ink replenishment for printed ink dots (Replenishment time; Hour:Minute:Second)
- Makeup replenishment (to an initial level)
Makeup replenishment to the initial level (Replenishment time; Hour:Minute:Second)
- Ink replenishment (to an initial level)
Ink replenishment to the initial level (Replenishment time; Hour:Minute:Second)
- Finish time
Finished time of replenishment (Hour:Minute:Second)

<Process of ink replenishment control>


Ink Sequence Initial level sensor: OFF Initial level sensor: ON
Concent-
ration
Normal Normal ink (1) Ink replenishment (for dot count (*1)) (1) Ink replenishment
concentration (2) Makeup replenishment (for dot count(*1))
(to the initial level) (No makeup replenishment)
Low Increasing (1) Ink replenishment (for dot count (*1))
No replenishment
concentration (2) Ink replenishment (to the initial level)
control (No makeup replenishment)
High Reducing (1) Ink replenishment (*2) No replenishment
concentration (2) Makeup replenishment
control (to the initial level)
(*1) In case of “Dot count < 65,536 dot”, ink replenishment is not performed and the dot count value
is added to next count.
(*2) Ink replenishment amount is the equivalent amount of Dot count – 3.2ml. In case of minus value,
ink replenishment is not performed.

2-52
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
● Automatic ink & makeup replenishment sequence

(1) (2)

Viscosity Waiting for Ink Makeup Ink


Printing
measurement defoaming replenishment replenishment replenishment
(30 minutes)
(10 minutes) (for dot count) (to initial level)

Step B1 Step B2 Step C1 Step C2 Step C3


Step B2 is for Pigment ink only.

<Log timing>
(1) Except Pigment model: End of Step B1
(2) Pigment model: End of Step B2

● Mode (Result of Automatic ink replenishment)

- Normal end
Mode = 1: Normal end at Step B1 or Step B2.
- The main tank ink level is higher than initial level when increasing or reducing
concentration control.
= 2: Normal end at Step C1.
- The main tank ink level becomes higher than initial level after ink
replenishment for dot count.
= 4: Normal end at Step C2
= 5: Normal end at Step C3

- Abnormal end or terminated


Mode = A: Abnormal end at step B1
= B: Terminated at step B1
= C: Abnormal end at step B2
= D: Terminated at step B2
= E: Abnormal end at step C1
= F: Terminated at step C1
= G: Abnormal end at step C2
= H: Terminated at step C2
= J: Abnormal end at step C3
= K: Terminated at step C3

2-53
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
(3) Viscosity control data (INKVISCO.TXT)
[Example]
Adjustment Initial level
of viscosity (H igh-

Average at (High- Control Control speed
№ Date Time №1 №2 №3 №4 №5 falling time Temperature Standard Viscosity speed code info. machine)
1 2011/7/7 0:29:23 1.58 1.58 1.58 1.57 1.57 1.57 34 2.22 107 0 Normal 0
2 2011/7/7 1:02:58 1.61 1.61 1.61 1.61 1.6 1.6 35 2.205 109 0 Normal 0
3 2011/7/7 1:36:33 1.64 1.63 1.64 1.64 1.63 1.63 35 2.19 112 0 Normal(->Low) 0
4 2011/7/7 11:23:24 1.64 1.64 1.64 1.64 1.63 1.63 33 2.305 107 0 Normal 0
5 2011/7/7 11:56:59 1.71 1.7 1.7 1.69 1.7 1.7 32 2.326 110 0 Low Concentration 0
6 2011/7/7 12:30:37 1.67 1.67 1.67 1.67 1.66 1.66 34 2.26 111 0 Normal(->Low) 0
7 2011/7/7 22:12:09 1.53 1.53 1.54 1.53 1.53 1.53 35 2.21 104 0 Instability 0
8 2011/7/7 23:55:48 1.52 1.52 1.52 1.51 1.51 1.51 34 2.225 102 0 Normal(High<-) 0

- No.1 to No.5
Plunger falling time No.1 to No. 5
- Average of falling time
Average of falling time (5 times)
- Temperature
Ink temperature measured by the sensor in the viscometer
- Standard
Standard ink viscosity at 100% ink concentration
- Viscosity
Ink viscosity (Average of falling time x Coefficient / Standard viscosity x100)
- Adjustment of viscosity (High-speed)
The “*” mark is indicated in the column during the adjustment of viscosity when the
position of initial level changed at the high-speed model.
- Control code & Control information
0: Normal
0: Normal (->Low) - Reducing concentration control due to the high ink concentration
0: Normal (High <-) - Increasing concentration control due to the low ink concentration
1: High Concentration - High ink concentration (120% < Ink viscosity)
2: Low Concentration - Low ink concentration (Ink viscosity < 80%)
3: Instability - Instability in the 5-times measurement of falling time.
(The difference between the maximum and minimum values of
falling time exceeded 10 % of average value.)
4: Out of range
- Initial level (High-speed machine)
The position of initial level at the high-speed machine (1 to 3) (0: At the other model)

2-54
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
(4) Circulation system control data (SEQUENCE.TXT)
[Example]
Aborted
№ Date Start time Finish timeCode Sequence name Result step № info1 info2 info3 info4
1 2011/7/7 7:05:29 0:02:09 160 Eject ink B 3 0 0 0 0 0
2 2011/7/7 7:06:56 1:53:16 208 Noclean-stop 0 0 0 0 0 0
3 2011/7/7 8:06:56 0:05:35 80 Nozzle backwash 3 0 0 0 0 0
4 2011/7/7 9:07:45 0:22:42 32 Ink drainage 3 0 0 0 0 0
5 2011/7/7 10:12:04 0:08:47 176 Eject ink A 0 0 0 0 0 0
6 2011/7/7 11:37:20 0:16:57 192 Clean-stop 0 0 0 0 0 0
7 2011/7/7 12:07:22 0:03:51 96 Gutter cleaning 1 2 0 0 0 0
8 2011/7/7 12:14:45 1:00:00 246 Ambient temp. upper lim. 0 0 40 30 0 0

- Code
Refer to the code of above example.
- Sequence name
Refer to the sequence name of above example.
- Result
0: Normal end, 1: Aborted, 2: Abnormal end
- Aborted step No.
Internal management code
- Info1-Info4
Internal management code
*) In case of change the ambient temperature upper limit on the system environment
screen, the before / after temperature value are indicated as below.

Before change: Info1


After change: Info2

(5) Trace data(TRACE.TXT)


[Example]
№ Cod Sequence name Date Time Information
e
1 001 Power turned on 2014/01/22 9:20:00
time
2 009 CM clock 2014/01/22 9:20:00 [CCPU], 2014/01/22, 9:20:10,
[MCPU], 2014/01/22, 9:20:10
3 003 Select message 2014/01/22 9:25:35 0001, normal

- Code : refer to the next page.


- Sequence name: refer to the next page
- Info1-Info4 : refer to the each Logging contents

2-55
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Code number and sequence name

Code Sequence name Code Sequence name


001 Power turned on time 016 Excitation V-ref. (Max)
002 Current time change 017 Unmatched language key
003 Select message 018 Upgrade recovery
004 Fault/warning log clear 019 Print interval mode
005 Set Viscosity 020 Solvent recovery system
006 Excitation V 021 Ink Drop Charge Rule
007 Serial number changer 022 Cable length change
008 Unmatched model key 023 Print overlap check change
009 CM clock 024 Alarm display
010 Restore 025 The Radio Law is acquired
011 Ink shelf life 026 Tag reading of cartridge
012 Input LotNo. 027 High temp. print control
013 Upgrade-key is short
014 Repair
015 Ambient temp. upper lim.

2-56
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
2.21 Rescue soft
- Use this function when the IJ printer does not start up during turn on procedure.
- Use the Rescue soft which is prepared by Hitachi.
- This function will initialize all registered data and settings, ensure reinstall all data and settings with
“Back up” data.

This function will be initialized the settings as below items on the list, ensure reinstall all data and
settings with “Back up” data.

1 Prepare Rescue USB.


1) Rename ‘RX2rescNNN_1._ex’ and ‘RX2rescNNN_2._ex’
to 'RX2rescNNN_1.exe’ and ‘RX2rescNNN_2.exe’

2) Copy the ‘RX2rescNNN_1.exe’ and ‘RX2rescNNN_2.exe’ into same folder.

3) Execute (double click) ‘RX2rescNNN_1.exe’ and ‘RX2rescNNN_2.exe’.exe for Create


“UXVUP” folder and “cj8resc_rx2”.

4) Copy the “UXVUP” folder and “cj8resc_rx2” to the USB root directly.

2 Rescue procedure.
1) Be sure to turn off the power.
2) Insert a rescue memory USB into the slot.
3) Turn on the power.
Download procedure start automatically.
4) Turn off the power when the download is completed.
5) Take the rescue USB from the USB port.
6) Turn on the power, the message of Model-key Information Difference will show up. Turn the
Power OFF and then back On after 10 seconds.
7) Turn off the Power. Insert the system data USB memory then turn on the power with the system
data USB memory card inserted. Download will be performed automatically.
8) Insert a USB with backup data into the USB port.
9) Turn on the power and data copy to the printer.
10) Turn off the printer and take the USB from the USB port.

[Caution]
● Format the USB with FAT16 or FAT32 by PC when USB memory error occurred.
● Turn off the printer then turn on again when some fault was occurred during rescue procedure or
the rescue process is stopped.

2-57
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
2 Resetting Items.

Confirm as following items after rescue procedure.

Item After rescue Back up data


Serial number Same before rescue -

Language1 : English,
Select Languages Language2 : none, Reinstall from language select screen.

Input mode : 1

Option setup Not supported Usable (Back up data)

Print data Original (shipment state) Usable

User pattern Original Usable

Standard character Original Usable

User environment setup Original Usable

System environment setup Original Usable

Communication environment Original Usable

Periodic replacement part mgmt.. Original Usable

Reinstall Ink operating time,


Operation setup Original
Cumulative op. time and Pint count.

Alarm history All blank -

Excitation V up data Excitation V-ref. [11] Usable

Touch screen setup Original Usable

Circulation control Original Reinstall Parts usage time management.

Maintenance password HIESMMDD Restore by spaschg.DAT

2-58
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
2.22 Dimensions for Tapered-Printhead Printing
●When it is necessary to place the printhead close to the conveyer or when the milk carton is printed,
refer to the following figures for the reference dimensions for the tapered-printhead printing.

1)In case that Tapered Printhead is placed close to Belt Conveyor


The bottom height of printing area, measured from the Belt conveyor *1.
・Print head angle:20°, Print distance:20mm、Target distance from the belt conveyor:4mm

Previous Model Model UX

<Inverted> <Inverted>

Belt conveyor (*1) Belt conveyor (*1)

<Upright> <Upright>

Belt conveyor (*1) Belt conveyor (*1)

2)In case the Tapered Printhead is placed for Milk Carton.


・Distance between the Tapered Printhead and Milk Carton:4mm
a)The print head is set levelly

Previous Model Model UX

<Upright> <Inverted> (*2)

(*2)
Milk
Carton

Milk <Upright>
Carton
(*2)

Milk
Carton

(*2):Print distance(From printing surface to print head.)


b)The Print head is set with an angle

2-59
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Previous Model Model UX

<Upright> <Inverted>
(*2)

(*2)
Milk
Carton

Milk <Upright> (*2)


Carton

Milk
Carton

(*2):Print distance(From printing surface to print head.)

●[Precautions on printing close to print target]

When the printing is made close to the print target, it is possible for the printhead cover to get stained inside
and outside by the ink splash bounced back from the print target. In order to avoid the print errors caused
by the stains, please ask the customer to watch the stains on the printhead and clean the printhead
periodically as needed.

2-60
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
3. Maintenance of controlling part
3.1 Construction of controlling part
The controlling part is mainly composed of a controller part of performing the display and
the data management, an engine part of performing the printing control and the
circulation system control, I/O part of performing external signal control, and interior of
inlet cover at primary power side.

Caution against electric shock


When opening the cover of the controller part, the engine part and I/O part, be sure
to cut off the power supply. And wait for at least 10 seconds before accessing.
The unit has such a part that high voltage is applied. When performing the
adjustment in a state where the cover is opened, be fully careful about an electric

[Controller part (cover-opening state)]


Fixing screw (3 locations)
[UX-D/E, B]

No fixing screw EZJ128

3-1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


[Engine part (cover-opening state)]

High voltage power supply


Multiple power supply

Battery

DC fan

EZJ125
EZJ126 EZJ132

[I/O part (cover-opening state)]

EZJ119 board
(Available as option)
Fixing screw (M3x2)

EZJ127 board IJP LAN UNIT


Fixing screw (M3x2) (Available on some models as option)
Fixed with plastic holder

! Caution
When opening the maintenance door in a state where the surface of the main body is
wet, ensure to remove water on the surface to prevent intrusion of the water to inside
of the main body and open it softly.

Caution against electric shock


When performing the mounting of each cover, be fully careful about a bite on the
cable.

3-2

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


[Interior of Inlet cover part (cover-opening state)]

Caution against electric shock


AC power is supplied to interior of the inlet cover. Be sure to cut off the power supply
and wait for at least 10 seconds to pull the power cable out of the outlet before
opening the cover. When performing the adjustment in a state where the cover is
opened, be fully careful about an electric shock.
Main power switch
Maintenance door
Side cover
Power cable
Main power
Inlet cover
switch

Power cable
Interior of the side cover

Caution when accessing to interior of the side cover


AC power is supplied to interior of the side cover. In order to avoid an electric shock,
be sure to turn off the power supply and wait for at least 10 seconds and pull the
power cable out of the outlet before opening the cover.
It is not necessary to remove Inlet cover or Inlet base when accessing to interior of
the side cover.

[Interior of the side cover(cover-opening state)]

[UX-D/E]
Ground wire
(Yellow/green spiral)

EZJ113 board

Caution against electric shock


Be sure to connect the ground wire
before turning on the power Caution (ATTENTION)
DOUBLE POLE/NEUTRAL FUSING.
(DOUBLE PÔLE /FUSIBLE SUR LE NEUTRE)
[UX-B]
Ground wire
(Yellow/green spiral)

Without board

3-3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


[Component table of the Controller circuit board and electric parts by models]

Y---Use, N---No use, OP---Option

[Controller circuit board]


Parts name Function UX-D/E UX-B
1 EZJ126A ASSEMBLY MPU board UX - D/E Y N
2 EZJ126B ASSEMBLY MPU board UX -B N Y
3 EZJ125 ASSEMBLY Nozzle Drive board Y Y
4 EZJ128 ASSEMBLY Controller board Y Y
5 EZJ127A ASSEMBLY I/O board UX - D/E Y OP
6 EZJ127B ASSEMBLY I/O board UX -B N Y
7 EZJ132 ASSEMBLY Circulation connection board Y Y
8 EZJ112A ASSEMBLY Phase sensor board Y Y
9 EZJ113 ASSEMBLY Power relay board Y N
10 EZJ114A ASSEMBLY LED/SW board UX- D/E Y N
11 EZJ114B ASSEMBLY LED/SW board UX-B N Y
12 EZJ129 ASSEMBLY SOP terminal board OP N
13 EZJ130 ASSEMBLY SOP controller board OP N
14 EZJ119A ASSEMBLY Relay output board OP OP

3-4

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


3.2 Controller part
- With regard to the electric parts/control board of the controller part, the functional
outline, the list of the check point and the note at the replacement are described.

3.2.1 EZJ128 board (controller board)


[ Function]
- Preparation/management of print data is performed.
- Program, user data and environment setup data are stored.
- Calendar management is performed.
- Control of the display part, touch panel, and USB memory are performed.
- Communication I/F (RS 422) with the engine part is performed.
[ Check points]
- Check points (check pins are not mounted)
Reference Name Content Reference Name Content
number number
F1 Vcc12 +12V (Power supply C55+ Vcc5 +5V
for LCD backlight) IC34-#1 Vcc33 +3.3V
F2 Vcc12 +12V IC34-#3 Vcc18 +1.8V
F3 Vcc5 +5V (Power supply for USB) - GND
[Notes in case of the EZJ128 board replacement]

! Caution
- When replacing EZJ128 board, system data USB memory is necessary.
System data USB memory is a memory that stores the latest version of software.
By executing download, software versions of EZJ128 and EZJ126 will be
matched. If download is not executed, it might cause unstable operation due to
mismatching of the software version.
- Saving of user data is necessary.
Save the data to USB memory by using the following procedure before replacing
the EZJ128 board, and recover the data after the replacement.
The same memory can be used for both System data USB memory and Backup
USB memory. Use USB memory (1GB or larger), which is commercially available.
- Before replacing boards, be sure to turn off the power.
- After replacing boards, be sure to joint connectors to right places.
Refer to 3.2.3 LCD and 3.2.4 Touch panel for the insertion and extraction of
Connectors of CN4 and CN6.
- 3 locations of fixing screws are shown in EZJ128 external view.

[ Replacement procedure of EZJ128 board ]


As for the copy data (1) Save the data on the USB memory by using the copy data function.
function, see “2.9
Backup”.
(From the IJP to the USB memory)
*) In the case where the EZJ128 board is replaced in a state allowing NO back up,
follow the instruction in the next page.
(2) Turn off the power.
(3) Open the control panel and remove connection cable and battery on the EZJ128
As for the System board.
reset, see “2.8 System (4) Replace the EZJ128 board.
reset”.
(5) Attach the connection cable and battery to the EZJ128 board.
(6) Insert the system data USB memory then turn on the power with the system data
USB memory card inserted. Download will be performed automatically.
As for the Unit
Information, see “2.10 (7) After download is completed, execute “System reset” on the second page of
Unit information”. the service maintenance screen.
(8) Confirm “Serial number” on the “Unit information” screen and then confirm the
date and time.
(9) Recover the data from the back up memory card by using the copy data function.
(From the USB memory to the IJP)

3-5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


! Caution
As for the copy data function, the user mode and the service personnel maintenance
mode are different. When replacing the EZJ128, put it into the service personnel
As for the System
reset, see “2.8 System
maintenance mode and then perform the backup.
reset”. -User mode: User data (printing data (Note 1), substitution rules, user patterns)
-Service personnel maintenance mode:
As for the Unit
User data (same as above) and unit-specific data (Note 2).
Information, see “2.10 After replacing the EZJ128 board, turn on the power of the IJP and confirm the
Unit information”. date and time. Perform set up again if it shows wrong date or time.
After replacing the EZJ128 board, turn on the power of the IJP and confirm the upgrade
function setup. Perform set up again if it shows wrong upgrade function setup.

(Note. 1) The print data are the print description, the printing specifications, the print line,
the print format, the calendar condition and the count condition.
(Note. 2) The unit specific data are the ink type, the nozzle diameter and the viscosity
calibration data.
- In the case where the EZJ128 board is replaced in a state allowing NO backup, follow the
procedure below.

[ Replacement procedure of EZJ128 board in a state allowing NO back up]


(1) Turn off the power.
(3) Open the control panel and remove connection cable and battery on the EZJ128
board.
(3) Replace the EZJ128 board.
(4) Attach the connection cable and battery to the EZJ128 board.
(5) Turn on the power with system data USB memory inserted.
Download will be performed automatically.
(6) Execute “System reset” on the second page of the service maintenance screen.
(7) Confirm “Serial number” on the “Unit information” screen and then confirm the
date and time.
(8) Perform setup and/or adjustment according to the following table.

No. Item Reference manual


1 Calibrate touch screen Instruction manual
coordinates “7.4 Calibrating the Touch Screen coordinates”
2 Touch screen setup Instruction manual “6.3 Touch screen setup”
3 Selection of ink type “2.2 System environment setup”
4 Nozzle diameter setting “2.2 System environment setup”
5 Excitation adjustment “2.3.1 Excitation adjustment”
6 Viscometer calibration or “2.6.1 Calibration of viscometer” or input ink viscosity
Viscosity coefficient input coefficient on “2.10 Unit information”
7 Adjustment of auto phase “2.3.4 Auto phase gain adjustment”
gain value
8 Excitation voltage setting Service manual “6.10 Excitation Setting Adjustment”
9 Readjustment of auto phase “2.3.4 Auto phase gain adjustment”
gain value
10 Editing print data Instruction manual “4.Creation and printing of message”
11 Setting of substitution rules Instruction manual
“4.10.3 Print by substituting a different character for the
date (Substitution rule)”
12 Creating a User pattern Instruction manual “7.3 Creating a user pattern”
13 User environment setup Instruction manual “6.1 Setting the user environment”
14 Setting the Date and Time Instruction manual “6.2 Setting a Date and Time”
15 Setting Communication Technical manual “5 Communication”
environment
16 Setting the Password Technical manual “3.2 Setting functions which can be
performed”

3-6

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


[EZJ128 board external views]
CN8
Connector for battery
connection
F1 F2 C55+ Fixing screw
(3 locations)
Fixing screw
(3 locations)
Connector for
EZJ 114 board

F3
Connector for
EZJ126 board

IC34 Connector for


USB

CN4
Connector for LCD
harness

CN6
Connector for
touch panel
Without Fixing screw
Fixing screw (3 locations)

! Caution
- Please use the Rescue soft when IJP does not normally stand up after exchanging
substrates.(Refer to “2.21 Rescue soft” for detail)

3-7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


3.2.2 Battery
[Function]
- The back up battery for the RTC (Calendar IC) on the EZJ128 board
- 2 batteries are used per 1 machine.
With respect to the setting
Backup batteries for EZJ126 board and EZJ128 board.
of date and time, refer to
the Instruction manual “6.2 [Note at the replacement]
setting the Date and
Time”.
! Caution
- Before replacing the battery, be sure to turn off the power.
- Be sure to insert it into CN8. (Or date backup cannot be performed)
- After replacing the battery on the EZJ128 board, turn on the power of the IJP
and set the date and time. Perform set up again if it shows wrong date or time.

[Battery attaching part external view]

CN8

Battery

EZJ128

3-8

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


! Caution
- When replaced with an incorrect type of battery, the battery is in danger of
exploding. Be sure to replace the battery with the one specified by parts list.
- When battery is disposed of, insulate it using tape, etc.
(1) If mixed with other metal or battery, uninsulated battery may cause
heating, fire or explosion.
(2) Do not put the battery into fire.
(3) If battery not used or battery of 3V or more is to be disposed of, connect
resistor of about 100 ohms between both terminals of battery, and
discharge for at least 48 hours. Then confirm that the battery voltage is
less than 3V and insulate electrodes using tape, etc. before disposal.
For removed batteries following the warning of “Battery Low”,
confirm that the battery voltage is less than 3V before disposal.

! ATTENTION
- Si vous remplacez avec un mauvais type de batterie, elle risque d’exploser.
Assurez-vous d’utiliser une batterie indiquée dans la liste des pièces.
- Lorsque vous jetez la batterie, isolez-la avec du ruban adhésif, etc.
(1) Mélangée à d’autres métaux ou batteries, une batterie non isolée peut
chauffer et provoquer un incendie ou une explosion.
(2) Ne pas jeter la batterie au feu.
(3) Si vous souhaitez jeter une batterie inutilisée ou une batterie de 3V ou
plus, reliez une résistance d’environ 100ohms aux deux bornes de la batterie,
puis laissez-la se décharger pendant au moins 48 heures.
Assurez-vous ensuite que la tension de la batterie est inférieure à 3V,
puis isolez les électrodes avec du ruban adhésif, etc. avant de jeter la batterie.
Pour les batteries retirées suite à l’avertissement «Batterie faible», assurez-vous
que la tension de la batterie est inférieure à 3V avant de la jeter.

3-9

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


3.2.3 LCD
[Function]
- The LCD panel for screen display.
[Note at the replacement]
- Be sure to turn off the power when replacing the panel.
- After replacing, insert the flexible flat cable that connects the LCD to EZJ128 board to
right places.

[Note at the insertion and extraction of flexible flat cable (hereinafter referred as FFC)]
(1) How to unlock
Press the actuator upward (Figure 1).
*Use your fingernails of thumb or forefinger and handle the actuator like flipping it
upward.

Figure 2

Figure 1

Actuator

Tools such as driver

! Caution when unlocking the actuator


Do not unlock the actuator by picking up with fingers or do not use tools such as driver
to unlock actuator as shown in figure 2. These may lead to a breakage of the actuator.

(2) How to insert the FFC


Insert the FFC with its contact surface facing down. Also insert the FFC in a direction
perpendicular to the connector. (Figure 3)

Figure 3 Figure 4

Contact surface

! Caution when inserting FFC


Insert the FFC in a direction perpendicular to the connector. Incorrect insertion like
shown in figure 4 could cause conduction failure or breakage of the actuator.

3-10

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


(3) How to lock the actuator
To lock the actuator, press it downward. When locking the actuator, apply the
pressure to the direction indicated by arrow (to the direction of inner side of the
connector) to avoid the separation of rotary shaft from the actuator.

[LCD external view]

Touch panel
Board mounting plate Fixing screws 1 Backlight harness
connection cable

EZJ128 board
EZJ136 board

Fixing Fixing
screws 3 screws 3

Fixing
LCD Flexible flat cable (FFC)
Maintenance door screws 2

[LCD replacement procedures]


(1) Turn off the Main power switch and open the Maintenance door.
(2) Remove Flexible flat cable (FFC) and Touch panel connection cable from EZJ136
board.
(3) Remove Fixing screws 1 (2pieces) and Fixing screws 2 (2pieces), and then remove
EZJ128 board with Board mounting plate.
(4) Remove Backlight harness from LCD.
(5) Remove EZJ136 board with cables connected, from LCD.
(6) Remove Fixing screws 3 (2pieces+2pieces), and then remove LCD.
(7) Replace LCD with new one, and then reassemble all the removed parts and cables in
reverse order of the procedures above.

! Caution

Tighten Fixing screws 2 (2pieces) and Fixing screws 3 (2pieces+2pieces) with


tightening torque 0.294±0.05Nm. If the tightening torque is too much, LCD will be
broken.

3-11

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


3.2.4 Touch panel
[Function]
-Input system for display screen operation.

[Note at the replacement]


- Be sure to turn off the power at replacement.
- After replacement, insert the connectors to right places.

! Caution when inserting or extracting touch panel connection cable

When inserting the touch panel connection


cable into the connector of the EZJ128
board, hold both sides of the reinforced
connecting portion as shown in the drawing,
and insert it so as not to fold the cable.

[Touch panel external view]

[UX-D/E, B]
Connection cable

Maintenance door Touch panel

[Replacement procedure of touch panel]

[UX-D/E, B]
(1) Refer to 3.2.3 LCD replacement procedure and remove the LCD.
(2) Remove the touch panel and install a new touch panel by performing opposite
procedure.

! Caution when replacing the touch panel


Wear the gloves when replacing the touch panel.
Handling with bare hands leaves fingerprints on the surface of the glass.
Wipe off the dust on the glass before replacement.

3-12

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


3.3 Engine part
- With regard to the electric parts/control board of the engine part, the functional
outline, the setting of the switch, the list of the check point and the note at the
replacement are described.

3.3.1 EZJ126 board (MPU board)


[Function]
- Performs printing control, circulation system control, nozzle control (charge
voltage, excitation voltage, auto phase and the like) and communication.
- Stores the user data (printing data, substitution rules) and operation
management information.
- EZJ126 board with the revision "D" onwards must be used on UX series.

[Setting of the switch, Check point, LED display etc]


- There is no check point with regard to setting of the switch or LED display.
- Check point
Reference number Name Content
TP321 PGND Ground
TP787 Sensor-N Signal of senor
TP774 Encoder-N Signal of encoder
TP1427 Print-in-progress Signal of Print-in-progress
[Notes in case of the EZJ126 board replacement]

! Caution
- When replacing EZJ126 board, system data USB memory is necessary.
As for the System System data USB memory is a memory that stores the latest version of software.
reset, see “2.8 System
reset”.
By executing download, software versions of EZJ128 and EZJ126 will be matched.
If download is not executed, it might cause unstable operation due to mismatching
As for the copy data of the software versions of EZJ128 and EZJ126.
function, see “2.9 - Saving of user data is necessary.
Backup”.
Save the data to USB memory by using the following procedure before replacing
the EZJ126 board, and recover the data after the replacement.
The same memory can be used for both System data USB memory and Backup
USB memory. Use USB memory (1GB or larger), which is commercially available.
- When replacing the EZJ126 board, be sure to perform “System reset” according to
the following procedure.
- Before replacing boards, be sure to turn off the power.
- After replacing boards, be sure to joint connectors to right places.
- Model key and Language key has the unit specific data. Be sure to remove the
With respect to the
replacement procedure of
model key and language key from old EZJ126 board and install that key to new
EZJ125, refer to “3.3.6 EZJ126 board.
EZJ125 board”.
[ Replacement procedure of EZJ126 board ]
With respect to the
(1) Save the data on the USB memory by using the copy data function.
replacement procedure of (From the IJP to the USB memory)
EZJ130, refer to “3.3.12 (2) Turn off the power.
EZJ130 board”.
(3) Open the control panel and remove connection cable and battery on the
EZJ126 board and EZJ125 board.
As for the Unit (4) Remove EZJ125 board. When EZJ130 board is installed, remove EZJ130.
Information, see “2.10
Unit information”. (5) Remove the cover of High voltage power supply, and then remove the EZJ126
board.
(6) Remove the model key from old EZJ126 board and install that key to new
EZJ126 board (CN25).
(7) Replace the EZJ126 board.
(8) Attach the cover of High voltage power supply, then attach connection cable and
battery to the EZJ126 board and EZJ125 board.
(9) Turn on the power with system data USB memory inserted.
Downloading will be performed automatically.
(10) After turning on the IJP, the messages of 「Memory Fault M」
「Print Data/Setting Notice」are displayed on screen display.
Please close the messages to touch the 「Close」button.
(11) Execute “System reset” on the second page of the service maintenance screen.
(12) Confirm “Serial number” on the “Unit information” screen and then confirm the
date and time.

3-13

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


(13) Recover the data from the USB memory by using the copy data function.
(From the USB memory to the IJP)
With respect to the
replacement procedure of
EZJ125, refer to “3.3.6
EZJ125 board”.
! Caution
As for the copy data function, the user mode and the service personnel maintenance
mode are different. When replacing the EZJ126, it is necessary to back up the
With respect to the unit-specific data, and so put it into the service personnel maintenance mode and then
replacement procedure of perform the backup.
EZJ130, refer to “3.3.12
EZJ130 board”. -User mode: User data (printing data (Note 1), substitution rules, user patterns)
-Service personnel maintenance mode:
As for the Unit User data (same as above) and unit-specific data (Note 2).
Information, see “2.10 -After replacing the battery on the EZJ126 board, turn on the power of the IJP
Unit information”.
and set the date and time. Perform set up again if it shows wrong date or time.

(Note. 1) The print data are the print description, the printing specifications, the print line, the print format,
As for the System
reset, see “2.8 System
the print condition and the count condition.
reset”. (Note. 2) The unit specific data are the ink type, the nozzle diameter and the viscosity calibration data.
- In the case where the EZJ126 board is replaced in a state allowing NO backup, follow the
procedure below.

[ Replacement procedure of EZJ126 board in a state allowing NO back up]


(1) Turn off the power.
(2) Open the control panel and remove connection cable and battery on the
EZJ126 board and EZJ125 board.
(3) Remove EZJ125 board. In the event of when EZJ130 board is installed,
remove EZJ130.
(4) Remove the cover of High voltage power supply, and then remove the EZJ126.
(5) Remove the model key from old EZJ126 board and install that key to new
EZJ126 board (CN25).
(6) Replace the EZJ126 board.
(7) Attach the cover of High voltage power supply, then attach connection cable and
battery to the EZJ126 board and EZJ125 board.
(8) Turn on the power with system data USB memory inserted.
Downloading will be performed automatically.
(9) Execute “System reset” on the second page of the service maintenance screen.
(10) Confirm “Serial number” on the “Unit information” screen and then confirm the
date and time.
(11) Perform setup and/or adjustment according to the following table.

No. Item Reference manual


1 Calibrate touch screen Instruction manual
coordinates “7.4 Touch screen coordinate correction”
2 Touch screen setup Instruction manual “6.3 Set up the touch screen”
3 Selection of ink type “2.2 System environment setup”
4 Nozzle diameter setting “2.2 System environment setup”
5 Excitation adjustment “2.3.1 Excitation adjustment”
6 Viscometer calibration or “2.6.1 Calibration of viscometer” or input ink viscosity
Viscosity coefficient input coefficient on “2.10 Unit information”
7 Adjustment of auto phase “2.3.4 Auto phase gain adjustment”
gain value
8 Excitation voltage setting Technical manual “6.10 Excitation V adjustment ”
9 Readjustment of auto phase “2.3.4 Auto phase gain adjustment”
gain value
10 Editing print data Instruction manual “4. Creation and printing of message.”
11 Setting of substitution rules Instruction manual
“4.10.3 Print by substituting a different character for the
date (Substitution rule)”
12 Creating a User pattern Instruction manual “7.3 Creating a user pattern”
13 User environment setup Instruction manual “6.1 Setting the user environment”
14 Setting the Date and Time Instruction manual “6.2 Setting a Date and Time”
Setting Communication Technical manual “5 Communication”
15
environment
Setting the Password Technical manual “3.2 Setting functions which can be
16
performed”

3-14

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


[EZJ126 board external views]

Connector for power


supply
TP321 “PGND” Connector for battery
connection

Connector for
EZJ130
Not mounted
on UX-B
TP774
TP1427
“Encoder-N”
“Print-in-progress”
TP323
“SGND”

TP787
“Sensor-N”

Not mounted on UX-B


Connector for
Connector for
EZJ125 board
model key

Two hexagonal spacers Connector for


Connector for
for fixing EZJ125 EZJ128 Language
key

! Caution
- Please use the Rescue soft when IJP does not normally stand up after exchanging
substrates.(Refer to “2.21 Rescue soft” for detail)

3-15

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


3.3.2 Battery
[Function]
- The back up battery for the RTC (Calendar IC) on the EZJ126 board
- 2 batteries are used per 1 machine.
Back up batteries are for EZJ126 board and EZJ128 board.

[Note at the replacement]

! Caution
- Before replacing the battery, be sure to turn off the power.
With respect to the setting
of date and time, refer to - Be sure to insert it into CN14. (Or date backup cannot be performed)
the Instruction manual “6.2 -After replacing the battery on the EZJ126 board, turn on the power of the
setting the Date and
Time”. IJP and confirm the date and time. Perform set up again if it shows wrong
date or time.

【Replacement procedure of battery】


(1) Save the data on the USB memory by using the copy data function.
(From the IJP to the USB memory)
(2) Turn off the power.
(3) Open the control panel and remove the battery.
(4) Replace the battery board.
(5) Turn on the power.
(6) After turning on the IJP, the messages of 「Memory Fault M」
「Print Data/Setting Notice」are displayed on screen display.
Please close the messages to touch the 「Close」button.
(7) Recover the data from the USB memory by using the copy data function.
(From the USB memory to the IJP)

Battery

CN14

With respect to the


replacement procedure of
EZJ125, refer to “3.3.6
EZJ125 board”. EZJ126
board
With respect to the
replacement procedure of
EZJ130, refer to “3.3.12
EZJ130 board”.
! Caution
- When replaced with an incorrect type of battery, the battery is in danger of
exploding. Be sure to replace the battery with the one specified by parts list.
-When battery is disposed of, insulate it using tape, etc.
(1) If mixed with other metal or battery, uninsulated battery may cause
heating, fire or explosion.
(2) Do not put the battery into fire.
(3) If battery not used or battery of 3V or more is to be disposed of, connect
resistor of about 100 ohms between both terminals of battery, and
discharge for at least 48 hours. Then confirm that the battery voltage is
less than 3V and insulate electrodes using tape, etc. before disposal.
For removed batteries following the warning of “Battery Low”,
confirm that the battery voltage is less than 3V before disposal.

3-16

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


3.3.3 Model Key
[Function]
- Store the unit-specific information and operate the unit with right function.
- An alarm message is displayed if the unit information stored in the model key differs
from the information stored in the unit.

[Note at the replacement]


- In the event of breakage of model key, the key needs to be replaced.
Contact to Hitachi factory.
- Do not install model key that are removed from other machines.
- Before the replacement, be sure to turn off the power.
- Remove the model key from old EZJ126 board and install that key to CN25 on new
EZJ126 board.
[Model key external view]

Connector for
EZJ126 board

3.3.4 Language Key (OPTION)


[Function]
- Add the language outside the support area.
- Store the serial number and additional language information.
- Languages outside the support area are not displayed if the unit information stored in
the language key differs from the information stored in the unit.

[Note at the replacement]


- In the event of breakage of language key, the key needs to be replaced.
Do not install any keys removed from other unit.
- Before the replacement, be sure to turn off the power.
- Remove the language key from old EZJ126 board and install that key to CN15 on new
EZJ126.
[Language key external view]

Connector for
EZJ126 board

3.3.5 Upgrade Key (OPTION)


[Function]
- Upgrade the function of the standard model.
- Refer to procedure of addition of function using UX-D/E upgrade key for addition of
the functions.

[Note at the replacement]


- Before the replacement, be sure to turn off the power.
- Remove the upgrade key from old EZJ126 board and install that key to connectors
of CN16 to 18.
- This function is dedicated to UX-D/E only.
[Upgrade key external view]

Connector for
EZJ126 board

3-17

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


[Procedure for function addition using upgrade key for UX-D/E]
(1) Turn off the power and turn on the power with upgrade key installed on EZJ126.
With respect to the setting (2) Input a special password for service maintenance mode on Select login user menu.
of service personnel (3) Select Upgrade screen on the second page of the service maintenance screen.
mode, refer to “2.1 setting
of maintenance mode by
(4) Upgrade screen is displayed.
service personnel”.
Upgrade function setup [Stop ] Warning Com 2015.07.07 12:45

HOME
Particle use 1 line f/2 f/1 f/1
2 line f/2 f/1.286 f/1
3 line f/2 f/1.47 f/1
4 line f/3 f/1.786 f/1
5,6 line f/3 f/3 f/3

Max registers 300 300-2000


Max printing columns 240 1000

Calendar items 3 8
Shift code, Time count NOT supported Cancel
Replacement items supported 99
Count items 48 8

Number of upgrades available : 4 Upgrade code OK


Number of upgrades used :
QS202

(5) Steps possible for upgrade is up to 2 steps for 1 key, 5 steps for 2 keys and 8 steps
for 3 keys.
(6) Select the items to upgrade then press OK.

Upgrade function setup [Stop ] Warning Com 2015.07.07 12:45

HOME
Particle use 1 line f/2 f/1 f/1
2 line f/2 f/1.286 f/1
3 line f/2 f/1.47 f/1
4 line f/3 f/1.786 f/1
5,6 line f/3 f/3 f/3

Max registers 300 300-2000


Max printing columns 240 1000

Calendar items 3 8
Shift code, Time count NOT supported Cancel
Replacement items supported 99
Count items 48 8

Number of upgrades available : 4 Upgrade code OK


Number of upgrades used : HR208

(7) Exit the maintenance screen then cancel the service personnel password by using
password protection.

3-18

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


3.3.6 EZJ125 board (Nozzle drive board)
[Function]
- Control of nozzle (charging voltage control, excitation voltage, APH detection, PTC
control and the like) is performed.

[Setting of switch/check point/LED display and the like]


- Setting of switch
Nozzle size
65µm

DSW1
Mark

Set both bits up.

DSW2
Mark
Set both bits up.
- Check point/ LED
Reference Name Contents
number
TP1 APH signal Charged amount detection signal of ink drops
TP3 GND Ground
TP12 Charging Character signal charging ink drops
signal
TP14 Excitation Sine wave signal applied to a nozzle
signal
With respect to the
charging voltage TP15 PTC signal PTC drive signal
confirmation, refer to LED1 APH signal For APH signal check with eyes
“2.3.2 Charging voltage
confirmation”.
[Note in case of the EZJ125 board replacement]
- When replacing boards, be sure to turn off the power.
With respect to the - Set up DSW1 and DSW2 according to the nozzle diameter.
excitation adjustment, - After replacing the board, confirm the charging voltage.
refer to “2.3.1 Excitation
adjustment”. - Perform the excitation adjustment and the auto phase gain adjustment.
- When removing the connector from CN2, CN3 and CN5, hold the socket housing and
With respect to the auto pull it out in straight.
phase gain adjustment, Hold the socket housing
refer to “2.3.4 Auto phase
gain adjustment”.

Connector on board

[Replacement procedure of EZJ125 board]


(1) Turn off the power.
(2) Remove the protective cover.
*) As the drawing below, push the hook of fixing spacer with finger and pull up the
protective cover. (Two spacers)

Push the hook Protective cover

Pull up Spacer for fixing


the cover the protective cover

EZJ125 board

3-19

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


(3) Remove the connectors from CN4, CN6 and CN7.
(4) Remove the EZJ125 board.
*) At first, remove the fixing screws (2 positions). Then as the drawing below, push the
hook of fixing spacer of EZJ125 board and pull up the EZJ125 board. (Two spacers)
Push the hook EZJ125 board

Pull up the Spacer for fixing


EZJ125 board the EZJ125 board

EZJ126 board

(5) Remove the spacer from EZJ125 board.


*) As the drawing below, push the hook of fixing spacer and pull up the spacer
(Two spacers)

Pull up the
Spacer for fixing
spacer
the protective cover

EZJ125 board

Push both sides of hooks


With respect to the
charging voltage
confirmation, refer to
(6) Remove the connectors from CN2, CN3 and CN5.
“2.3.2 Charging voltage (7) Replace the EZJ125 board and then install the each part by reversing the above
confirmation”. procedure.
(8) Set up DSW1 and DSW2 according to the nozzle diameter.
With respect to the (9) Confirm the charging voltage.
excitation adjustment,
refer to “2.3.1 Excitation (10) Perform the excitation adjustment and the auto phase gain adjustment.
adjustment”.
TP12: Charging signal
With respect to the auto [EZJ125 board external view] TP14:
phase gain adjustment, CN5
refer to “2.3.4 Auto phase Excitation signal
gain adjustment”.
Two spacers for fixing
Two spacers for fixing
EZJ125 board
EZJ125 board
CN3
Two spacers for fixing
a protective cover

DSW1 TP15: PTC signal

TP1: APH signal


CN2
DSW2 TP3: Ground
Two spacers for fixing
a protective cover

Two fixing screws Two fixing screws


LED1

Caution against an electric shock


The EZJ125 board has a portion where high voltage is applied. In order to avoid an
electric shock, be sure to turn off the power and wait for at least 10 seconds before
accessing the EZJ125 board.

3-20

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


3.3.7 EZJ127 board (I/O board)
[Function]
- The I/F signal with the conveyer is connected.
Output signal: Ready, Fault, Warning, Printing-in-progress/Print-complete, On-line,
With respect to the wiring,
refer to Technical manual Universal output 1, Universal output 2
“4 Connection of signals”. Input signal: Print target detector, Print stop, Reciprocative printing,
Encoder (for product speed matching), Deflection voltage ON/OFF,
Run, Reset ,Stop
- External communication: RS-232C connection
- I/O board for UX- D/E is EZJ127A and I/O board for UX-B is EZJ127B.
In order to add the option (Addition of standard communication and input/output
signal) for UX-B, it is necessary to change the I/O board from EZJ127B to EZJ127A.
Regarding the replacement procedure to add the option, refer to the following
procedure.

[Connection to the external connection terminal block (TB1) ]


Pin Name of signal Input / Output
Remarks
No. NPN Interface PNP Interface NPN PNP
1 Power supply for Print target detector Output - DC24V,100mA max. (*1)
2 Print target detector Input - Power supply can be selected by SW1
3 Ground for Print target detector -
4 Print stop Input - NPN / PNP can be selected by SW2
5 Signal ground - - UX-D/E: Standard, UX-B: Option
6 Power supply for encoder Output - DC24V,100mA max. (*1)
7 Encoder signal (Totem pole) Input - Totem pole / Open collector (NPN) can be
8 Encoder signal (Open collector NPN) Input selected by SW1
9 Ground for Encoder - - Power supply can be selected by SW1

10 Ready - Output - - Open collector (NPN) only.


11 Signal ground - - -
12 Fault - Output -
13 Warning - Output -
14 Deflection voltage ON/OFF signal Input ● NPN / PNP can be selected by SW2
15 Reciprocative print signal Input ● UX-D/E: Standard, UX-B: Option
16 Run signal Input
17 Reset signal Input-
18 Stop signal Input-
19 Print-in-progress / Print-complete Output - Print-in-progress/ Print-complete can be
selected with screen operation.
20 Online output Output - NPN / PNP can be selected by SW2
21 Universal output 1 Output - UX-D/E: Standard, UX-B: Option
22 Universal output 2 Output
23 Signal ground -

(Note 1): Available supply current for print target detector and encoder is up to 100mA in total.

! Caution when wiring for external


- Faulty wiring causes the substrate breakdown. Before wiring, be sure to confirm the
terminal signal.
- Before wiring, be sure to turn off the power.

3-21

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


[Setting of switch/check point/LED display and the like]
- Setting of switch
[SW1] ON
ON

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
OFF
SW1 Set content Default
Bit 1 Setting is performed according to the specification of the encoder. ON
Bit2 (Refer to the setting by types of the specification described below.) OFF
Bit3 Setting is performed according to the specification of the print target detector . ON
Bit4 Setting is performed according to the specification of the encoder. OFF
Bit5 Setting is performed according to the specification of Print target ON
detector.
Bit6 (Refer to the setting by types of the specification described below.) OFF
Bit7 Reserved (set to OFF) OFF
Bit8 Print target detector signal noise filter setting OFF
( Time constant: t = 2.2 millisecond)
< Print target sensor >
- When supplying power from the IJ printer :
Set as shown in the following table depending on the output form of the print
target sensor.
Output form SW1 – 5 SW1 – 6
Open collector(NPN) ON OFF
Open collector(PNP) OFF ON
- When using the external dedicated power supply:
Set as shown in the following table is not depending on the output form of the
print target sensor.
Output form SW1 – 5 SW1 – 6
Open collector(NPN) OFF OFF
Open collector(PNP) OFF OFF

< Rotary encoder >


- When supplying power from the IJ printer :
Set as shown in the following table depending on the output form of the rotary
encoder.
Output form SW1 - 1 SW1 – 2 SW1 - 3 SW1 - 4
Totem pole OFF OFF ON ON
Open collector ON OFF ON OFF

- When using the external dedicated power supply :


Irrespective of the output form of the rotary encoder, set as shown in the
following table depending on the power supply voltage.
Power supply voltage SW1 - 1 SW1 - 2 SW1 - 3 SW1 - 4
DC 12V OFF ON ON OFF
DC 24V OFF OFF ON OFF

[SW2]
Switching that the input signal connection is NPN/PNP is set.
*) Input signal: Print stop, Reciprocative printing, Deflection voltage ON/OFF,
Run, Reset , Stop
Input / Output NPN Input / Output PNP
Mark Mark
DSW2

Both of bits are put on the bottom Both of bits are put on the up position.
Input NPN / Output PNP Input PNP / Output NPN
Mark Mark
DSW2

Set only the right bit to the up position. Set only the left bit to the up position.

3-22

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


- Check point/LED
Reference Name Content
number
TP6 Floating GND Reference ground of external part (conveyer side) photo
coupler insulation circuit
LED1 Print target detector When the Print target detector is ON, it is lighted.
input
LED2 Printing stop input (PNP) When the printing stop signal input (PNP) is ON, it is
lighted.
LED3 Printing stop input (NPN) When the printing stop signal input (NPN) is ON, it is
lighted.
LED4 Rotary encoder input When the rotary encoder signal input for product speed
matching is ON, it is lighted.
LED5 Deflection voltage When the deflection voltage ON/OFF signal input (PNP) is
ON/OFF input (PNP) ON, it is lighted.
LED6 Deflection voltage When the deflection voltage ON/OFF signal input (NPN) s
ON/OFF input (NPN) ON, it is lighted.
LED7 Reciprocative printing When the reciprocative printing signal input (PNP) is ON, it
input (PNP) is lighted.
LED8 Reciprocative printing When the reciprocative printing signal input (NPN) is ON, it
input (NPN) is lighted.
LED9 Run input (PNP) When the run signal input (PNP) is ON, it is lighted.
LED10 Run input (NPN) When the run signal input (NPN) is ON, it is lighted.
LED11 Reset input (PNP) When the reset signal input (PNP) is ON, it is lighted.
LED12 Reset input (NPN) When the reset signal input (NPN) is ON, it is lighted.
LED13 Stop input (PNP) When the stop signal input (PNP) is ON, it is lighted.
LED14 Stop input (NPN) When the stop signal input (NPN) is ON, it is lighted.
LED15 Printing output (PNP) When the printing-in-progress/printing-completed signal
output is ON, it is lighted.
LED16 Online output (PNP) When the online output is ON, it is lighted.
LED17 Universal output 1 (PNP) When the universal output 1 is ON, it is lighted.
LED18 Universal output 2 (PNP) When the universal output 1 is ON, it is lighted.
LED20 Printing output (NPN) When the printing-in-progress/printing-completed signal
output is ON, it is lighted.
LED21 Online output (NPN) When the online output is ON, it is lighted.
LED22 Universal output 1 When the universal output 1 is ON, it is lighted.
(NPN/PNP)
LED23 Universal output 2 When the universal output 2 is ON, it is lighted.
(NPN/PNP)

[Note in case of the EZJ127 board replacement]


- When replacing the board, be sure to turn off the power.
- Before replacing the board, be sure not to supply the electric power to the wires
connecting to TB1.
- Perform the setting of SW1 and 2.
-There are two type of EZJ127 board. (EZJ127A and EZJ127B)
- When replacing the board, first remove the harness from the board by removing
the fixing screws, Then, pulling the board upward and securing enough space to work,
disconnect the harness.

3-23

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


[EZJ127A board external view]

Two fixing screws TP6 Terminal block: TB1 Two fixing screws

LED1 – LED23 SW1 SW2 Lot number:


(Last digit: A)

[EZJ127B board external view]


Terminal block:
TB1 (13 pins) Two fixing screws
Two fixing screws TP6

LED1, LED4,LED19 SW1


Lot number:
(Last digit: B)

[Usage for the External connection terminal block 1 (TB1)]


- Applicable cable size : AWG26 to 16 (Φ0.5to 1.3)
Twist the
- Wire covering to be stripped : 8 to 9 mm wires
(1) Push
(2) Insert

Terminal block
(TB1)
3-24

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


[Procedure to add the option for UX-B (change to EZJ127A board)]
(1) Turn off the power and be sure not to supply the electric power to the wires connecting
to TB1.
(2) Remove the connectors and change to EZJ127A board. (Two fixing screws)
(3) Insert the connectors and perform the setting of SW1 and 2.
(4) Turn on the power.
(5) Input a special password for service maintenance mode on the select login user menu.
(6) Press “Option setup” button at the second page of the maintenance menu.

Option setup
button

(7) Change the software option 20 “Standard communication B” to “Enable”.

(8) Return to the user maintenance mode on the password protection menu.

With respect to the setting


of service maintenance
mode, refer to “2.1 Setting
of maintenance mode by
service personnel”.

3-25

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


[External communication (RS-232C)]
- Connector for external communication (RS-232C) is mounted on EZJ127A board.
- Using signals: SD, RD and SG
- Signal specification (NC: Unconnected)
Pin number Name Input/Output Remarks
1 (NC) - Unconnected
2 RD Input
3 SD Output
4 DTR - Connected to DSR on IJ printer
5 SG - Ground
6 DSR - Connected to DTR on IJ printer
7 RTS - Connected to CTS on IJ printer
8 CTS - Connected to RTS on IJ printer
9 (NC) - Unconnected

1# 5#

Attaching screw: Inch screw

6# 9#

Connector on EZJ127 board: 9-pin D-sub connector (Plug)

IJ Printer External device

SD Output RD
Send data
#3
RD Input SD
Receive data
#2
DTR Output
#4
DSR Input
The control signals
#6
are looped back on
RTS Output
EZJ127 board. #7
CTS Input
#8

SG #5
SG

Cable length : maximum 5m


FG

- Connector position: Inside the top cover (upper part of cabinet)

EZJ127 board

Connector for
EZJ119A board communication
(Option) (RS-232C)
CN3

Terminal block Terminal block


(M4 screw) (Push type)
TB2 (Option) TB1

3-26

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


[ Circuit diagram of EZJ127A ]

3-27

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


[ Circuit diagram of EZJ127B ]

3-28

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


3.3.8 EZJ132 board (Ink circulation module connection board)
[Function]
- Electrical connection board between control part and ink circulation module part.
[Notes in case of the board replacement]
- Before replacing the board, be sure to turn off the power.
- Use a φ2 lenghe:160mm Philips screw driver.

[EZJ132 board external view]


CN1 (A side): CN2 (A side):
Connection to EZJ126 board Connection to EZJ126 board
(For motor & Ink circulation module) (For magnetic valve)
Six fixing screws Six fixing screws

CN3 (B side): CN4 (B side):


Connection to motor & Ink circulation module Connection to magnetic valve

3.3.9 EZJ113 board (Power relay board)


[Function]
- Relay board for AC power turning ON and OFF
- This is dedicated control board for UX-D/E. (Not used for UX-B)
[Notes in case of the board replacement]
- After replacing the board, be sure to joint connectors to right places.

Caution against an electric shock


AC power is supplied to the EZJ113 board. In order to avoid an electric
shock, turn off the power and wait for more than 10 seconds, pull the plug
out of socket, and then access the EZJ113 board.

[EZJ113 board external view] Three fixing


Three fixing spacers
spacers
CN3
(Connection to
EZJ114 board)

CN4
CN2 (Connection to
(Connection to EZJ126 board)
AC power input) CN1
(Connection to
multiple power supply)

One fixing screw


Three fixing
(M3)
spacers

3-29

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


[Replacement procedure of EZJ113 board]
(1)Turn off the power and wait for more than 10 seconds. Then pull the plug out of socket.
(2)Open the maintenance door and remove the ground wire.

(3) Remove the fixing screws (4 positions) and remove the side cover
and remove the ground wire.
(It is not necessary to remove the inlet base and inlet cover.)

Maintenance door

Side cover
Main power
switch

Four fixing
screws

Power cord

(4) Remove the connectors (CN1, 2, 3, 4) and change EZJ113 board.


(Three fixing spacers and one fixing screw.)
(5) Insert the connectors to right places.

Ground wire connecting [Inside of side cover]


position

EZJ113
CN3

CN2
CN4

CN1

(6) Place the ground wire terminal around the connecting position, then close the side
cover. When closing the cover, be sure not to pinching of wires.
(7) Connect the ground wire terminal to the ground wire connecting position.

Caution against an electric shock


Be sure to connect the ground wire.

3-30

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


3.3.10 EZJ114 board (LED / SW board)
[Function]
- LED display of Power, Ready, Fault, Warning, and Start / Stop switch

[Notes in case of the board replacement]


- Before replacing the board, be sure to turn off the power.
- After replacing the board, be sure to joint connectors to right places.

[EZJ114 board external view]

CN2: Two fixing screws


(Connection to (M3)
EZJ126 board)

CN3:
(Connection to
EZJ128 board) CN1:
CN4:
SW2 SW1
(Connection to
(Stop) (Start) EZJ113 board)
USB connector
Note) These parts are not mounted
on EZJ114B board for UX-B

3.3.11 EZJ119A board (Relay output board) (Optional board)


[Function]
- Relay output (Ready, Fault, Warning) for conveyer.

[Notes in case of the board replacement]


- Before replacing the board, be sure to turn off the power.
- Before replacing the board, be sure not to supply the electric power to the wires
connecting to TB2.

[EZJ119A board external view]


Terminal block: Two fixing screws
Two fixing screws (TB2: M4) (M3)
(M3)

SW3:
Ready output CN7:
selector switch (Connection to
EZJ126 board)
[ Replacement procedure of EZJ119A board ]
(1) Turn off the power and open the top cover.
(2) Remove the connectors (CN7) of EZJ119A board.
(3) Remove the two fixing screws.
(4) Install a new EZJ119A board by reversing the above procedure.

3-31

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


[Connection to the external connection terminal block (EZJ119A -TB2) ]
Pin Name Remarks

1 NC 30VAC/0.5A or 30VDC/1A
2 Ready NO 30VAC/0.5A or 30VDC/1A
3 COM
4 NC 30VAC/0.5A or 30VDC/1A
5 Fault NO 30VAC/0.5A or 30VDC/1A
6 COM
7 NC 30VAC/0.5A or 30VDC/1A
8 Warning NO 30VAC/0.5A or 30VDC/1A
9 COM
Terminal specification: M4

[Setting of switch 3]
The ready output selector switch (SW3) is used to enable or disable the ready signal
output.

Switch setting Ready output status


When this setting is employed, the ready output signal is enabled.
The path between the TB2 terminals opens or closes depending
3 on whether the IJ printer is ready.
2 Ready state Not-ready state
1-3 contact Open 1-3 contact Closed
1 TB2 2-3 contact Closed 2-3 contact Open
SW3

When the NC contact (break contact) is used, the ready output


3 signal is disabled. The path between the TB2 terminals opens as
2 shown in the table below no matter whether the IJ printer is ready.
1 Ready state Not-ready state
SW3 TB2 1-3 contact Open 1-3 contact Open
(Default)
When the NO contact (make contact) is used, the ready output
signal is disabled. The path between TB2 terminals 1 and 3 opens
3 and the path between TB2 terminals 2 and 3 closes as shown in the
2 table below no matter whether the IJ printer is ready.
1 Ready state Not-ready state
SW3 TB2 2-3 contact Closed 2-3 contact Closed

3-32

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


3.3.12 EZJ130 board (Software option control board)
[Function]
- Input / output control board when software option is used. (Option for UX-D/E)

[Notes in case of the board replacement]


- Before replacing the board, be sure to turn off the power.
- After replacing the board, be sure to joint connectors to right places.

One fixing screw


(M3)

CN2:
(Connection to
EZJ129 board)

CN1:
(Connection to
EZJ129 board)

CN4:
(Connection to EZJ126 board)

[ Replacement procedure of EZJ130 board ]


(1) Turn off the power and open the maintenance cover.
(2) Remove the connectors (CN1, CN2) of EZJ130 board.
(3) Remove one fixing screw.
(4) Unplug the EZJ130 board from the connector CN10 on EZJ126 board and change
the EZJ130 board.
(5) Install a new EZJ130 board by reversing the above procedure.

Fixing screw

EZJ130 board

EZJ126 board

3-33

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


[ Setting of SW/Check point/Display of LED etc ]
[SW1]
●Setting of input signal

Calendar stop signal Reserve input


SW1

Mark Mark

Both of bits are put Set the right bit to


on the up position the bottom.

3-34

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


3.3.13 EZJ129 board (Software option terminal board)
[Function]
- Input / output terminal board when software option is used. (Option for UX-D/E)

[Notes in case of the board replacement]


- Before replacing the board, be sure to turn off the power.
- After replacing the board, be sure to joint connectors to right places.
- Before replacing the board, be sure not to supply the electric power to the wires
connecting to TB3.
- Perform the setting of SW4 to 8.

[EZJ129 external view]

Two fixing screws TB3 : External signal terminal


Two fixing screws

CN4: CN8: CN9:


External communication (RS-232C) Connector for EZJ130 Connector for EZJ130
D-SUB 9-pin connector

[ Replacement procedure of EZJ129 board ]


(1) Turn off the power and open the top cover.
(2) Remove two fixing screws.
(3) Remove the connectors (CN8, CN9, CN4) and wires from TB3.
(4) Install a new EZJ129 board by reversing the above procedure.
(5) Perform the setting of SW4 to SW8.

- Inside the top cover (upper part of cabinet)

Two fixing screws

EZJ129 board

EZJ127A board

EZJ119A board
(Option)

3-35

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


[Specification of RS-232C communication connector]
- External equipment is connected to the EZJ129 by serial communication of RS-232C.

-Signal used : RD,SD,DTR,SG,DSR,RTS,CTS


-Wiring ( NC is No connection )
Pin number Name Input / Output Remarks
1 (NC) - No connection
2 RD Input
3 SD Output
4 DTR Output
5 SG - Ground
6 DSR Input
7 RTS Output
8 CTS Input
9 (NC) - No connection

#1 #5

Attaching screw: inch screw

#6 #9
Circuit board side connector: 9 pin D-sub connector (plug)

IJ Printer External device

SD Output RD
Send data
#3
RD Input SD
Receive data
#2
DTR Output DSR
#4
DSR Input DTR
#6
RTS Output CTS
#7
CTS Input RTS
#8

#5
SG SG

Cable length : maximum 5m


FG

3-36

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


[Connection to external connection block (TB3)]
Pin Name of signal Input / Output
Remarks
No. NPN/PNP Interface NPN/PNP
1 Signal ground -
2 Signal notifying Completion of signal input Output -NPN / PNP can be selected by SW7
3 Signal during calendar Updating Output
4 Strobe signal Input - NPN / PNP can be selected by SW8
5 Signal ground -
6 Data message number signal bit 11 Input - NPN / PNP can be selected by SW8
7 Data message number signal bit 10 Input
8 Data message number signal bit 9 Input
9 Data message number signal bit 8 Input
10 Data message number signal bit 7 Input
11 Data message number signal bit 6 Input
12 Data message number signal bit 5 Input
13 Data message number signal bit 4 Input
14 Data message number signal bit 3 Input
15 Data message number signal bit 2 Input
16 Data message number signal bit 1 Input
17 Data message number signal bit 0 Input
- Signal can be selected by
18 Calendar stop / Reserve input Input EZJ130-SW1
- NPN / PNP can be selected by SW8
19 Reserve signal ground -
20 Reserve input Input
21 Reserve input Input
22 Reserve input Input
23 Reserve input Input
-Output/Input can be selected by
Reserve power source /Power supply
24 Output/Input SW4,SW6
/ External power supply (DC24V)
- DC24V, Max.40mA
25 Reserve -
26 Reserve input Input
27 Reserve input Input

! Caution when wiring for external


- Faulty wiring causes the substrate breakdown. Before wiring, be sure to confirm the
terminal signal.
- Before wiring, be sure to turn off the power.

3-37

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


[ Setting of SW ]
●Setting of SW
[SW4]
ON
ON

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
OFF

SW4 Description Default


Bit 1 Reserve ( Set to OFF ) OFF
Bit 2 Sets host communication (Set to OFF) OFF
Bit 3 Sets host communication (Set to OFF) OFF
Bit 4 Switches the filter constant of strobe signal (capacitance) OFF
ON : 0.047 (uF) + 2.2(uF)
OFF : 0.047 (uF)
Bit 5 Sets the polarity of strobe signal transmitted from host. ON

Setting Photo coupler operation


(voltage level at TB3 pin 8)
ON

OFF

Bit 6 Reserve ( Set to OFF ) OFF


Bit 7 Reserve ( Set to ON ) ON
Bit 8 Sets Power supply ON
ON: In case of using Power supply
OFF: In case of not using Power supply

[SW5]

ON
ON

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
OFF

SW5 Description Default


Bit 1 Reserve ( Default setting is right table) OFF
Bit 2 OFF
Bit 3 OFF
Bit 4 ON
Bit 5 OFF
Bit 6 ON
Bit 7 OFF
Bit 8 ON

3-38

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


[SW6]

ON
ON

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
OFF

SW6 Description Default


Bit 1 Reserve ( Set to OFF) OFF
Bit 2 OFF
Bit 3 OFF
Bit 4 OFF
Bit 5 OFF
Bit 6 OFF
Bit 7 OFF
Bit 8 OFF

[SW7]
Setting it according to the reserve input signal connection is NPN/PNP.
(Default setting is put on the up position.)

NPN I/F PNP I/F


SW7

Mark Mark

Both of bits are put Set the right bit to the


on the up position bottom.
[SW8]
Setting it according to the data message number signal connection is NPN/PNP and the use of the
power supply. (Default setting is both of bits are put on the up position.)

When supplying power from IJ Printer When using external power supply
NPN I/F PNP I/F NPN I/F PNP I/F
SW8

Mark Mark Mark Mark

Both of bits are put Set the left bit to the Set the right bit to Both of bits are put
on the up position bottom the bottom. on the bottom

3-39

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


-Check points / LED-

Reference Name Contents


number
TP4 Floating GND Reference ground of external part (conveyer
side) photo coupler insulation circuit
LED1 Reserve input -
LED2 Reserve input -
LED3 Reserve input -
LED4 Calendar stop /Reserve input1 (NPN) -
LED5 Calendar stop /Reserve input1 (PNP) -
LED6 Data message number signal When the data message number signal bit 0
bit 0(NPN) input (NPN) is ON, it is lighted.
LED7 Data message number signal When the data message number signal bit 0
bit 0(PNP) input (PNP) is ON, it is lighted.
LED8 Data message number signal When the data message number signal bit 1
bit 1(NPN) input (NPN) is ON, it is lighted.
LED9 Data message number signal When the data message number signal bit 1
bit 1(PNP) input (PNP) is ON, it is lighted.
LED10 Data message number signal When the data message number signal bit 2
bit 2(NPN) input (NPN) is ON, it is lighted.
LED11 Data message number signal When the data message number signal bit 2
bit 2(PNP) input (PNP) is ON, it is lighted.
LED12 Data message number signal When the data message number signal bit 3
bit 3(NPN) input (NPN) is ON, it is lighted.
LED13 Data message number signal When the data message number signal bit 3
bit 3(PNP) input (PNP) is ON, it is lighted.
LED14 Data message number signal When the data message number signal bit 4
bit 4(NPN) input (NPN) is ON, it is lighted.
LED15 Data message number signal When the data message number signal bit 4
bit 4(PNP) input (PNP) is ON, it is lighted.
LED16 Data message number signal When the data message number signal bit 5
bit 5(NPN) input (NPN) is ON, it is lighted.
LED17 Data message number signal When the data message number signal bit 5
bit 5(PNP) input (PNP) is ON, it is lighted.
LED18 Data message number signal When the data message number signal bit 6
bit 6(NPN) input (NPN) is ON, it is lighted.
LED19 Data message number signal When the data message number signal bit 6
bit 6(PNP) input (PNP) is ON, it is lighted.
LED20 Data message number signal When the data message number signal bit 7
bit 7(NPN) input (NPN) is ON, it is lighted.
LED21 Data message number signal When the data message number signal bit 7
bit 7(PNP) input (PNP) is ON, it is lighted.
LED22 Data message number signal When the data message number signal bit 8
bit 8(NPN) input (NPN) is ON, it is lighted.
LED23 Data message number signal When the data message number signal bit 8
bit 8(PNP) input (PNP) is ON, it is lighted.
LED24 Data message number signal When the data message number signal bit 9
bit 9(NPN) input (NPN) is ON, it is lighted.
LED25 Data message number signal When the data message number signal bit 9
bit 9(PNP) input (PNP) is ON, it is lighted.

3-40

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Reference Name Contents
number
LED26 Data message number signal When the data message number signal bit 10
bit 10(NPN) input (NPN) is ON, it is lighted.
LED27 Data message number signal When the data message number signal bit 10
bit 10(PNP) input (PNP) is ON, it is lighted.
LED28 Data message number signal When the data message number signal bit 11
bit 11(NPN) input (NPN) is ON, it is lighted.
LED29 Data message number signal When the data message number signal bit 11
bit 11(PNP) input (PNP) is ON, it is lighted.
LED30 Strobe signal (NPN) When the strobe signal input (NPN) is ON,
it is lighted.
LED31 Strobe signal (PNP) When the strobe signal input (PNP) is ON,
it is lighted.
LED36 Signal during calendar Updating When the Signal during calendar Updating (PNP)
(PNP) is ON, it is lighted.
LED37 Signal notifying Completion of When the Signal notifying Completion of signal
signal input (PNP) input (PNP) is ON, it is lighted.
LED39 Signal during calendar Updating When the Signal during calendar Updating
(NPN) (NPN) is ON, it is lighted.
LED40 Signal notifying Completion of When the Signal notifying Completion of signal
signal input (NPN) input (NPN) is ON, it is lighted.

3-41

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


[ Circuit diagram of EZJ129 ]

3-42

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


3.3.14 Multiple Power Supply
[Function]
- AC input: AC100 ~ 240V (50/60Hz)
DC output: +3.4V, +5.1V, +12V, -12V, +24V
[Note at the replacement]
- In a few seconds after turned off the power, residual voltage is remaining on the parts
of multiple power supply.
- When replacing the multiple power supply, turn off the power and wait for more than
10 seconds, pull the plug out of socket, and then access the multiple power supply.

DC output for AC input connector (8pin)


CN2 of EZJ126 board

CN2

CN4

Fixing hole of hexagonal spacer Fixing hole of hexagonal spacer


(Two positions) (Two positions)

Caution against an electric shock


In order to replace the multiple power supply, it is necessary to access inside the side
cover which has a portion where AC power is applied.
The multiple power supply has a portion where high voltage is applied. In order to avoid an
electric shock, turn off the power and wait for more than 10 seconds, pull the plug out of
socket, and then access the multiple power supply.

[Replacement procedure of multiple power supply]


(1) Turn off the main power and wait for more than 10 seconds.
Then pull the plug out of socket.
(2) Remove the fixing screws (6 positions) and remove the side cover.
(It is not necessary to remove the inlet base and inlet cover.)

Maintenance door

Side cover
Main power
switch

Four
fixing
screws

Power cord

3-43

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


(3) Disconnect the AC input connector of multiple power supply inside the side cover.
[Inside of side cover]

< UX-D/E > < UX-B >


Ground wire Ground wire
(Yellow/green (Yellow/green
spiral) spiral)

EZJ113 board

AC input
connector

(4) Open the maintenance door.


(5) Remove the wire harness from the wire clamp put on the high voltage power supply
protective cover.
In order to access the (6) Remove the protective cover of high voltage power supply and then remove the
high voltage power
supply, refer to “3.3.15 high voltage power supply.
high voltage power (7) Remove the wire harness from the wire clamp put on the multiple power supply flame.
supply ”.
(8) Remove the fixing screw of back cover.
(9) Remove the two fixing hexagonal spacers and then remove the multiple power supply.
[NOTE] Since the multiple power supply is stuck on the back cover with
double-stick tape, strong power may be needed in the case of removal.

Fixing screw

[Inside of maintenance cover]


Two fixing hexagonal spacers

High voltage
power supply
With respect to the
clamping position of wire Protective cover
harness, refer to “3.3.18 Multiple power supply
Electrical connection of High voltage
diagram”. power supply

EZJ125 board
EZJ126 board

(10)Remove the connector CN2 and 4 of multiple power supply.


(11)Install a new multiple power supply by reversing the above procedure.
Check the clamping position of wire harness and connection of connectors on EZJ126
board (CN11-14, 20-22, 24).

3-44

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


3.3.15 High Voltage Power Supply
[Function]
- Deflection voltage output : DC 5.7kV Max.
Charge signal source voltage output : DC500V

Caution against an electric shock


The high voltage power supply has a portion where high voltage is applied. In order to
avoid an electric shock, be sure to turn off the power before access the high voltage power
supply.

[Note at the replacement]


- When replacing the high voltage power supply, be sure to turn off the power.
- If the high voltage line is dusty, a fault may occur due to a leakage of high voltage.
Wipe the dust off the line in the case where it is dusty.
- When connecting the deflection voltage output connector, be sure to joint the connector
to right position.

Two fixing Two fixing spacers


screws

Control signal input High voltage line


For CN6 of EZJ125
Deflection voltage output
(DC5.7kV MAX)

Charge signal source


voltage output
(DC500V)
Two fixing spacers Two fixing
screws

[Replacement procedure of high voltage power supply]


(1) Turn off the main power and open the maintenance door.
(2) Remove the wire harness from the wire clamp put on the high voltage power supply
protective cover.
(3) Remove the protective cover of high voltage power supply.
(4) Remove the high voltage power supply.
Remove the two fixing screws and two fixing spacers.
(5) Install a new high voltage power supply by reversing the above procedure.
With respect to the
clamping position of wire Check the clamping position of wire harness.
harness, refer to “3.3.18
Electrical connection
diagram”.

3-45

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


3.3.16 DC fan
[Function]
- Input voltage: DC 24V
For air agitation to uniform the controller part air temperature

[Note at the replacement]


- When replacing the DC fan, be sure to turn off the power.
- Be sure to joint the connector.
- When installing the DC fan, pay attention to the mounting direction of NP (name plate)
and harness.

Fan guard

DC fan

Mark

Fan guard

Fan plate

Two fixing screws of Fan plate

Red wire: 24V


Black wire: GND
White wire: Sensor output

DC fan

Fan guard
Two fixing screws of DC fan

Fan plate

[Replacement procedure of DC fan]


(1) Turn off the main power and open the maintenance door.
(2) Remove the DC fan connector (CN21) on EZJ126 board.
Remove the two fixing screws of fan plate.
(3) Remove the two fixing screws of DC fan , then remove the DC fan.
(4) Install a new DC fan by reversing the above procedure.

3-46

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


3.3.17 TUP-I (for UX-D/E only)
[Function]
- Input voltage:DC24V; Output specification:RJ-45 connector; Ethernet
Communication.
- TUP-I is Ethernet communication unit, using IJP communication library.
[Precautions for replacement]
- Be sure to turn off the main power switch before starting replacement.
- Ensure to insert connectors.
- When Ferrite core is removed from LAN-cable, be sure to reassemble it.

[TUP-I appearance]

Ethernet connector

EZJ127 connector

CN9

[Replacement procedures]
(1) Turn the main power switch off, and then open I/O cover.
(2) Remove LAN cable from Ethernet connector on TUP-I.
(3) Remove TUP-I from TUP-I holder (plastic holder).
(4) Remove the harness connectors (2 places) connected to EZJ127 board from TUP-I.
(5) Replace TUP-I, and then reassemble the removed parts and connectors in reverse
order of the procedures above.

[Part positions]

CN3: EZJ127 board

TUP-I holder
(plastic holder)

EZJ127 board

Ferrite core
TUP-I
[I/O cover is opened.]

3-47

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


3.3.18 IJP LAN Unit (ILU) (Option)
[Function]
- Input voltage: DC 24V
Output specification: RJ-45 connector, Ethernet communication

[Note at the replacement]


- When replacing the ILU, be sure to turn off the power.
- Be sure to joint the connectors.
Straight slot screws
[ILU external view] (M2.5)

Ethernet
connection

Connection for
EZJ127 board

[Replacement procedure of ILU]


(1) Turn off the main power and open the I/O cover.
(2) Remove the LAN cable connector from ILU Ethernet connection port.
(3) Remove the wire harness from the connector CN3 on EZJ127 board.
(4) Remove the ILU from plastic holder in I/O area.
(5) Remove the six wires and connector for EZJ127 board from the ILU.
(6) Install a new ILU by reversing the above procedure.

[ILU connection specification]


No. Terminal name Connection specification
1 IN 0 Brown wire
2 OUT 0 Red wire
3 24V Orange wire
4 0V Yellow wire
5 IN CO Green wire
6 OUT CO Blue wire
7 SERIAL (EZJ127) RJ-45 plug

3-48

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


3.3.19 RFID reader
[Function]
- Read Ink ID or Makeup ID from IC tag on Ink/Makeup cartridge bottle.
Select Login user ID by reading IC card as a consequence call the print data of the user.

[Precaution for RFID reader replacement]


- When you replace RFID reader, be sure to turn the main power off.

[Procedures of RFID reader replacement]


(1) Turn off the main power.
(2) Open the control panel.
(3) Remove Protective cover as shown in the drawing below.
Push the Hook of the fixing spacer by finger, and then pull up Protective cover.
(For Two spacers)
Protective cover
Push Hook

Spacer for fixing


Pull up Protective cover
protective cover (2 pieces)

EZJ125 board
(4) Dismount RFID-reader harness from CN27 (connector) of EZJ126 board.

EZJ125 board
Protective cover

CN27

RFID-reader harness EZJ126 board

3-49

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


(5) Peel off FB sheet.
(6) Unscrew three (3) fixing screws for Front beam, and then remove Front beam.
[Caution] When you remove Front beam, DO NOT pull RFID reader harness by force.

Front-beam sheet Fixing screws (3 pieces) for Front beam

Front beam

(7) Unscrew two (2) fixing screws for RFID reader cover, and then remove
RFID reader cover.
(8) Pull out RFID-reader harness from connector. RFID reader harness

Fixing screws (2 pieces )


RFID reader harness
for RFID reader cover

RFID reader cover

RFID reader cover RFID reader Connector

(9) Replace RFID reader with a new one. Then attach the removed parts in reverse
order of the procedures above.
[Caution] When you attach Front-beam sheet, be sure to the following
(3) points below.
• Replace Front-beam sheet to a new one.
• Confirm that there is NO adhesive remaining on the Front beam.
• Attach the new Front-beam sheet by pushing the Front-beam sheet to
the left side of the convexed frame.

Left side of the convexed frame.

Front beam

Front-beam sheet

Danger of Electrical shock


When you attach Front beam, be sure that the electrical wires or cables are
NOT to be pinched between any parts.

3-50

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


3.3.20 Electrical Connection Diagram

3-51

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


3-52

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


- Regarding the wire harness clamping position inside the maintenance cover,
refer to following list.

[UX model wire harness list]


No. Parts No. DWG No. Name
A 3J83N95321 Card connector UX
B 2N4ZL2142A LED harness UX
C 1N4ZE0065A Controller harness UX
D 2N4ZL2138A Relay harness UX
E 3N4ZM5783A AC harness assembly B
F 451882 2N4ZH9186A Sub switch harness assembly
G 451874 2N4ZH9252A Inlet harness assembly
H 451890 2N4ZH9193A Main switch harness assembly
I 451881 2N4ZH9191A Multiple power supply harness assembly
J 1N4ZE0502A MGV harness UX
K 2N4ZL2146A Level sensor harness UX
L 1N4ZE0501A Sensor harness UX
M 451888 3N4ZM4183A High-voltage harness H assembly
N 2N4ZL2144A High-voltage harness S UX
O 1N4ZE0066A I/O harness UX
P 2N4ZL2139A Connection harness MV UX
Q 2N4ZL2140A Connection harness S UX
R 1N4ZE0067A OP I/O harness UX
S 2N4ZL2154A Relay output harness assembly
T 2N4ZL2155A LAN UNT harness assembly
U - Print head harness
V 2N4ZL4975A RFID reader harness

[Clamp position inside the maintenance cover]

2
4
3
1

[Clamping position of wire harness]

Clamp number Clamping wire harness number


(1) N
(2) O
(3) M
(4) O

3-53

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


4. Maintenance of Circulation System
4.1 Structure of Circulation System
4.1.1 General Structure of Circulation System
The general structure of the circulation system is shown in the following figure. Using an
open/close type door (unit door) as a partition, the system is roughly divided into an ink
circulating area (the front side of the equipment) and a driving part area (the rear side of
the equipment).
Driving part area Ink circulating area

Ink cartridge

Unit door

Ink filter
Exhaust duct

Main ink tank

Makeup cartridge

Pump unit

[Caution]
Since the circulation unit is made of plastic, tightening the screws with excessive torque will break the unit.
See the table below for reference torques:

Reference tightening
Parts where Material
Fixing screw (Part to be fixed) torque
screws are used. tapped
N·m kgf·cm
Pump unit PBT(G30) 1.7±0.3 17.3±3
Self-tapping screw M4X12
Circulation unit PBT(G30) 1.7±0.3 17.3±3
(Viscometer, etc.)
Ink main tank PBT(G30) 1.7±0.3 17.3±3
Self-tapping screw M4X16
Circulation unit PBT(G30) 1.7±0.3 17.3±3
(Solenoid valve)
Self-tapping screw M4X35 ADC12
Pump unit 1.7±0.3 17.3±3
(Circulation unit) (aluminum)
Self-tapping screw B M3X10 Pump unit
PBT(G30) 0.5±0.1 5.1±1
(ICU joint) Circulation unit

4-1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


4.1.2 Access to the parts on the front side of the equipment

1 Remove the Inner cover (T).


.
2 Remove the fixing screws(2) (2 pieces) and draw the reservoir unit out to the front
halfway by supporting “a” part (4 places) with both hands.
Reservoir Unit

Inner cover (B) Rock pin guard

【CAUTION】
Please do not remove the
a a
rock pin guard.
When you removed any
chance, please return to the
original.
Fixing screw(2) Pull out Reservoir Unit

3 Remove the tubes and cables from the clamp. Remove

Clamp Tube/Cable Clamp Tube/Cable


4 Pull the reservoir unit out further and put it on the maintenance cover.

[CAUTION]
Carefully mount the Reservoir unit back
to its place so that the piping tube of
the recovery filter is not pinched.

After performing the task of pulling the


Reservoir unit, please make sure that the
level sensor is functioning normally Street.

Reservoir Unit

Maintenance cover

4-2

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


<Cautions when Recovery filter base is removed>
When the Recovery filter base is removed, please confirm the following points as described in the figure
below.
・Please confirm the Twist-Locks (Cable Fastener) are securely fastened to the Recovery filter
connecting tubes.

Recovery filter connecting tubes


(2 pieces)

Twist-Lock (Cable Fastener, 2 pieces)

・Please refer to the figure below and check the positions where the banding bands are placed.
Confirm the four pieces of banding bands are positioned as shown in the figure below. It shows the
locations of Banding bands and Twist-Locks.

Twist-Lock (Cable Fastener, 2 pieces)


Banding Band (4 pieces)

Recovery filter base

<Cautions when Reservoir unit is pulled outside>


Please confirm following 2 points when the Reservoir unit is pulled outside as indicated in the figure in step
4 of “4.1.2 Access to the parts on the front side of the equipment”.

(a). The length of the recovery filter tubes is limited, only approximately 330mm. When the Reservoir unit is
pulled outside, remove the fixing screw (1 position) first, then hold the Recovery filter base with your hand
to remove the Reservoir unit from its original position. Carefully pull out the Reservoir unit, paying
attention so that the tubes cannot be caught.
(b). When the parts are reassembled, confirm that the recovery filter base is placed back to its original
position.

Recovery filter base

Fixing screw

4-3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


4.1.3 Access to the parts on the rear side of the equipment

(1) Access method from the front

1 Perform “4.1.2 Access to the parts on the front side of the equipment” and pull the
reservoir unit out.
2 Remove the fixing screws (2 pieces) of the unit door and open the unit door.
[Caution] Take care not to cause the tubes to be caught.

Unit door

Fixing screws

Unit door

4-4

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


(2) Access method from the rear

1 Remove fixing screws (11 positions) of the rear cover and detach it.

Rear cover

These two screws can remain loosened.

4-5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


4.2 Main Ink Tank Maintenance
4.2.1 Structure of Main Ink Tank
1 Front Ink Level can roughly be confirmed by
viewing the Drain Tube.
[CAUTION]
When Air Trap is observed, conduct Air
removal until no Air Trap is observed.
Check the Level surface.
The Air Trap will not interfere with the
operation of the printer.

Drain Tube

Main Ink Tank

2 Top Black
Yellow Red Blue G White
OFF 3 2
1

Main Ink Tank

3 Rear Main Ink Tank Tube Lock


(K)

Tube Lock
Tube Lock (Q)
(G)
Tube Lock
(P)
Fixing screw

Tube Lock
(Drain Tube)

4-6

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


4.2.2 Main Ink Tank Replacement Procedure
1 Drain the ink in the main ink tank.
(Execute “Ink Drainage” or drain ink from the drain tube.)

2 Turn off the power supply.

3 Perform “4.1.2 Access to the parts on the front side of the equipment” and pull out the
reservoir unit.

4 Turn over the filter clamp and remove the Ink filter.

5 Remove the fixing screw(2 pieces) and remove the filter clamp.
Drain Tube Joint Tube Lock (1)
Filter clamp

Recovery Tube Joint

Tube Lock (5)


(UX-E only)
Filter Clamp

Ink filter
Fixing screw
6 Remove the joints of Recovery Tube and Drain Tube. (2 places)

7 Remove the Tube Lock. (UX-E : 2 Places [(1) and (5)], UX-D/B : 1 Place (1) ) See the figure
above.
[ Caution] Put wiping paper under the main ink tank to avoid ink dripping on the floor, etc.

8 Remove the wire connecting part screws (5 positions) of the liquid level sensor on the main
ink tank. Red Black
Yellow 3 Blue G White
OFF 2 1

Main ink tank

4-7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


9 Remove the fixing screws (2 positions) and remove the Makeup reservoir.

Fixing screws Makeup reservoir

10 Remove the Solenoid cable from the hook on the Inner cover (B).

Hook

Solenoid Cable

Inner cover (B)

[Caution] Pay attention NOT to pinch the Solenoid Cable while above work is implemented.

11 Remove the fixing screw (1 position) and take out the main ink tank.

12 Remove the tube locks (5 positions).


[Caution] Put wiping paper under the main ink tank for ink dripping.

Main ink tank


Tube lock
(K)

Tube lock
Tube lock (Q)
(G)
Tube lock
Fixing screw (P)

Tube lock
(Drain tube)

4-8

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


13 Remove the fixing screws (2 positions) and take out the inner cover (B)

Main ink tank

Inner cover (B)

Plug

ICU joint
(UX-E only)

Fixing screws

14 Clean the portion stained with ink and then install the main ink tank in reverse order of the
procedures above.
[Caution] On Model UX-E, when you replace main ink tank which was mounted in the printer
with replacement part, replace the plug on the replacement part with the ICU joint which is
delivered together .

15 Route the solenoid cable to the hook of the inner cover (B).
(Refer to the figure in step 10 for how to route the Solenoid Cable.)

16 Installing the new Makeup Reservoir in reverse order of the procedures above.
[Caution] When installing the Makeup Reservoir, confirm that the Solenoid Cable is
routed to the hook of the inner cover(B).
When installing the Makeup Reservoir, out the hook of the Makeup reservoir
into the hole of the Reservoir base first.
Reservoir base
Makeup reservoir Reservoir base Makeup reservoir

Hook

Hook
Pay attention NOT to pinch the Solenoid Cable.
17 Perform “Ink refill” and make sure that there is no ink leak.
4.2.3 Removal method of the Main ink tank lid
[Cautions when URGENT OVERHAUL of the Main tank is
required]
• Main ink tank can be overhauled by unfastening the screws
on top.
• Prepare a new Main tank packing before starting the
overhaul.
* In some cases, the Main tank packing mounted between
The Main ink tank and the lid may be deformed and may
not be put back in.

Fixing screws(8pcs)
4-9

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


4.3 Pressure Reducing Valve Replacement Procedure

1 Perform “Pressure relief”.

2 Perform the procedures described in “4.1.2 Access to the parts on the front side of the
equipment”.

3 Remove Fastening screw M4x12 (2 positions: upper right and lower left of Pressure
reducing valve) and Pressure reducing valve itself.
And remove the O-ring S-4 (1 piece).
"Caution" : Put wiping paper under Pressure reducing valve to avoid dripping on the
floor, etc.

Fixing screw M4X12


Pressure reducing valve
O-ring S-4
Pressure reducing valve

4 Prepare a new Pressure reducing valve and a new O-ring (1 piece).


[Caution] Make sure to use O-ring S-4 (1 piece).

6.5 7.7
O-ring S-4 O-ring 4.7

5 Wet O-ring S-4 with makeup and put it on the joint of the new Pressure reducing valve.

6 Attach the new Pressure reducing valve in reverse order of the procedures above.

[Caution] When attaching the Pressure reducing valve, make sure O-ring S-4 is kept in
place and it does not fall off.
Pay attention to the orientation of the Pressure reducing valve joint.
[“AI” mark shall look Down.]

7 Perform “Ink Replenishment” and adjust the pressure. Make sure that there is no ink leak.

4-10

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


4.4 ICU Joint Structure and Handling

When removing the tube during the maintenance work, loosen


the tube lock beforehand.
The ICU joint shall be removed only when damaged.

Procedures for installing the tube ICU joint


1 Pass the tube through the tube lock. Tube lock

2 Insert the end of the tube into the end


of the ICU joint.

3 Tighten the tube lock.


Tube
[Caution] Excessive tightening may
cause damage to the tube.

Procedures for removing the tube


1 Loosen the tube lock.
Assembled
2 Pull out the tube. state

Procedures for installing the ICU joint (only Pump unit replacement or when damaged)
1 Mount the O-ring on the ICU joint.

2 Wet the O-ring with the Connection port


makeup and then insert it O-ring S4
into the connecting port of the
circulation unit.
[Caution]
If it cannot be inserted smoothly,
the O-ring may have jammed and get
stuck.
Perform the procedures starting
from Step 1 again.
ICU joint
3 Tighten the fixing screw.
[Caution] Do NOT over-tighten the screw or
screw may strip and keep on turning. Fixing screw
Procedure for removing the ICU joint
(only Pump unit replacement or when damaged)

1 Remove the fixing screw.

2 Pull out the ICU joint.

3 Remove the O-ring left at the connection port of the circulation unit by tweezers.
[Caution] Perform the above operation taking care not to give damage to the internal
surface of the connection port.

4-11

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


4.5 Solenoid Valve Replacement Procedure
・ Parts inside the solenoid valve (diaphragm, etc.) cannot be replaced separately. In the case of
part failure, replace the entire solenoid valve.
・ The coil mold of the solenoid valve (black resin portion) is not resistant to solvents. Do not
immerse the coil mold in solvent. The coil mold however can be wiped gently with solvent.

[Caution]・Work contents differ according to the solenoid valve No. to be replaced.


・If the solenoid valve does not operate, conduct the replacement work with particular attention to
dripping.

1 Perform the following preparation for each solenoid valve that you are to replace.
Solenoid When the solenoid valve is working When the solenoid valve is not working
valve No.
MV1 Execute “Ink drainage”. Drain the ink of the main ink tank from
the drain tube.
MV2 (1) Remove the tube connection No operation is required.
block of the ink reservoir. (Pay attention to ink dripping.)
(2)Turn on the pump, MV2, and
MV6 in this order for about one
minute, and then turn them off.
(Solenoid/Pump Test screen)
MV3 Execute “Gutter Cleaning”. No operation is required.
(Pay attention to ink dripping.)
MV4 Execute “Ink drainage”. No operation is required.
(Pay attention to ink dripping.)
MV5 Execute “Nozzle backwash”. No operation is required.
(Pay attention to ink dripping.)
MV6 Execute “Ink drainage”. No operation is required.
(Pay attention to ink dripping.)
MV7 Execute “Ink drainage”. Drain the ink of the main ink tank from
the drain tube.
MV8 Execute “Pressure relief”. No operation is required.
(Pay attention to makeup dripping.)
MV11(*1) No operation is required. No operation is required.
(Pay attention to makeup dripping.) (Pay attention to ink dripping.)
MV12(*1) Execute “Pressure relief”. No operation is required.
(Pay attention to ink dripping.)

2 Turn off the power supply.

【Work from the front】


3 Perform “4.1.2 Access to the parts on the front side of the equipment”.

【Work from the rear】


3 Perform “4.1.3 Access to the parts on the rear side of the equipment”.

4 Remove the connector of the solenoid valve to be replaced.


Solenoid valve No. Wire color Solenoid valve No. Wire color Solenoid valve No. Wire color
MV1 Brown MV5 Green MV11(*1) Brown
MV2 Red MV6 Blue MV12(*1) Red
MV3 Orange MV7 Purple - -
MV4 Yellow MV8 Gray - -
*1 MV11 and MV12 are mounted on UX-E only.

4-12

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


5 Remove the fixing screws (2 positions) of the solenoid valve.
"Caution": Put wiping paper under the solenoid valve to provide for an ink drip.

MV3 MV4 MV7 MV2

Orange Yellow Purple Red


Fixing screws
(2 Positions)
MV6 MV5 MV8 MV1
Blue Green Gray Brown

6 Clean the portion stained with ink and then install the new solenoid valve in reverse order
of the procedures above.
[Caution] Securely set the O-ring in the groove of the solenoid valve.
Pay extra attention not to cause the O-ring to fall off or pinched.
<UX-E only>
Solenoid valve

O-ring(S24)

O-ring4.7
MV11 MV12
Gray Red

7 Reset the time of the replaced solenoid to 0 on the “Parts usage time
management” screen.

4-13

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


4.6 Pressure Sensor Replacement Procedure
1 Perform “Nozzle Backwash”. (Till stopped automatically without sucking
the makeup into the gutter)

2 Turn off the power supply.

3 Perform “4.1.3 Access to the parts on the rear side of the equipment”.
(The reason is that the connector is located on the rear side of the equipment.)

4 Remove the connector of the pressure sensor.

Pressure sensor
Connector for pressure sensor

Unit door

5 Remove the screws (2 positions) that fix the pressure sensor.


The pressure sensor can be removed.

[Caution] Put wiping paper under the solenoid valve for ink dripping.

Pressure sensor

Fixing screws Joint

4-14

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


6 Remove the fastener fastening the pressure sensor to the joint and remove
the pressure sensor by pulling.
[Caution] Put wiping paper under the Pressure sensor for ink dripping.

Joint
Pressure sensor
Fastener

7 After cleaning the portion stained with ink, wet the new O-ring with makeup and mount
on the joint.

O-ring 7.5

Joint

8 Insert the pressure sensor to the joint and fix it with the fastener that was removed
in step 6.
[Caution] Use a new O-ring.
Mount carefully so that the O-ring does not fall out or is not pinched.

9 Return the unit to its original state by performing the procedures in reverse order.

10 Eject ink and make sure the ink pressure is normal.

4-15

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


4.7 Circulation Unit Replacement Procedure

1 Perform “Ink drainage” and then “Pressure relief”.

2 Turn off the power supply.

3 Perform “4.1.2 Access to the parts on the front side of the equipment” and draw out the
reservoir unit.

4 Perform “4.1.3 Access to the parts on the rear side of the equipment” “(1) Access method
from the front” and open the unit door.
[Caution] Be careful not to catch the tubes.

5 Remove the tubes (13 positions*) that are connected to the circulation unit.
*14 positions for UX-E.
[Caution] Be careful about ink dripping. Tubes (13 positions*)
14 positions for UX-E.

*:UX-E
only

[Caution] On Model UX-E, when you replace circulation unit which was mounted in
the printer with replacement part, replace the plug on the replacement part with the ICU
joint which is delivered together .

6 Remove the wire harness from the clamps (5 positions).

4-16

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


7 Disengage the connectors of the electrical parts (15 positions) (motor,
solenoid valves (8 positions), pressure sensor, viscometer (3 positions),
level sensor and float sensor).
5 positions

1 position
8 positions

1 position

8 Remove the fixing screws at that fix the circulation unit (4 positions).
The circulation unit can be removed.
Circulation unit

Fixing screws
Fixing screws

9 Clean the portion stained with ink and then install the new Circulation unit in reverse order
of the procedures above.

10 Perform “Makeup refill” and then “Ink refill”.


Make sure that any ink leak or makeup leak is not occuring at any places.

4-17

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


4.8 Pump part replacement

4.8.1 Pump Unit Replacement Procedure


1 Perform “Ink drainage” to “Pressure relief”.

2 Turn off the power supply.

3 Perform “4.1.3 Access to the parts on the rear side of the equipment”, “(1) Access
method from the front” and open the unit door.
[Caution] Be careful not to catch the tubes.

4 Remove the wire harness from the clamps (5 positions).

5 Disengage the connectors of the electrical parts (6 positions) (pressure sensor,


viscometer (3 positions), level sensor and float sensor).
5 positions

1 position

4-18

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


6 Pull out connectors(6 positions) toward the front, which were disengaged in item 5
above. Then, remove the tubes (4 positions) and remove the screws (2 positions) that fix
the pump unit on the door.
(Remove the tube from the ICU joint, which is shown by dashed line. Remove the other
tubes (3 positions) by loosening the tube locks.

Tubes Pull out connectors(6 positions) Tube Pump unit

Door

Fixing screws
Fixing screws

7 Remove two screws which are located topside. These screws are fixing ICU Fixing plate
to Pump unit.
Fixing screw Pump unit Fixing screw

ICU fixing plate


ICU fixing plate

4-19

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


8 Remove the fixing screws (8 positions) which connects both the upper part and the lower
part of the circulation unit. The pump unit can be removed.

"Caution": Put wiping paper under the pump unit to provide for an ink drip.

Pump Unit

ICU fixing plate


Fixing screws (8 positions)

9 Clean the portion stained with ink and make sure that the O-rings (4 positions) are
securely mounted in the concaves of the lower-side circulation unit. Then, install the
new pump unit in reverse order of the procedures above.

10 Perform “Ink refill” and adjust the pressure. Make sure that there is no ink leak.

11 Reset the pump time to "0" on the “Parts usage time management” screen.

4-20

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


4.8.2 Drive unit replacement procedure
1 Perform “Ink drainage” to “Pressure relief”.
2 Turn off the power supply.
3 Perform “4.1.3 Access to the parts on the rear side of the equipment”, “(1) Access
method from the front” and open the unit door.
[Caution] Be careful not to catch the tubes.
4 Remove the wires from clamps (5 positions).
Clamps

Clamp

5 Remove the Motor connection connector.

Drive unit

Motor connection
connector

4-21

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


6 Holding the drive unit by hand, remove the fixing screw (6 pieces), and remove
the drive unit.

Fixing screws
Fixing screws

Pump unit

7 Remove the Drive unit from the Pump unit.


[ Caution] When the Drive unit is removed, the springs on the Pump head (4 pieces)
are freed causing the internal parts (diaphragms) elongated. To avoid this, put the Drive
unit back to its place approximately within 30 minutes.

8 Attach the new Drive unit in reverse order.

4-22

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


4.8.3 Pump head replacement

1 Perform “Ink drainage” to “Pressure relief”.

2 Turn off the power supply.

3 Perform “4.8.2Drive unit replacement procedure” and remove the drive unit .

4 Remove the fixing screws (2 positions) and remove the pump head.
[Example] The following figure below indicates the case of the circulation pump head
removal.
[Caution] Be careful not to lose the O-ring.

Supply pump Circulation pump


Makeup pump Recovery pump

Fixing screws (2 pieces)

Pump head (Circulation pump) O-ring

4-23

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


5 Clean the portion stained with ink and then install the new pump head in reverse
order of the procedures above.
[Caution] Make sure to use new O-rings. (2 pieces)
Be careful not to cause the O-ring to fall off or pinched.
Refer to the figures below for identifications of 4 kinds of pump heads.

1 position 2 positions 3 positions 4 positions

Supply pump head Makeup pump head Circulation pump head Recovery pump head

6 Reset the pump time to "0" on the “Parts usage time management” screen.

4-24

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


4.8.4 Motor replacement

1 Turn off the power supply.

2 Perform “4.1.3 Approach to the parts on the rear side of the equipment”, “(1)Access
method from the front” and open the unit door.
[Caution] Be careful not to catch the tubes.

3 Remove the connector from the Motor.

Motor connector

Motor Unit door

4 Remove the fixing screws (4 positions) of the motor.

Pump unit Motor Fixing screw (4 pcs)

4-25

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


5 Install the new motor in reverse order of the procedures above.

Pump unit Motor Fixing screw (4 pcs)

Board shall look down.

[CAUTION]
Beware of Motor Rotation!
When checking the motor with IJP door opened, watch the motor rotation and/or being
caught by motor.

4-26

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


4.8.5 Gear replacement

1 Turn off the power supply.

2 Referring to 4.8.2 Drive unit replacement procedure and remove the drive unit.
[Caution]
When the drive unit is removed, the springs on the pump head (4 pieces) are freed
causing the internal parts (diaphragms) elongated.
To avoid this, put the drive unit back to its place approximately within 30 minutes.

3 Remove the fixing screws (2 positions) and take out the pump cover.

Motor Fixing screws Pump cover

4 Referring to 4.8.4 Motor replacement, remove the motor.

5 Hold the D-cut of the drive shaft by spanner and remove the hex. head bolt near the gear.

6 Shift the drive shaft as shown by an arrow and remove the shaft from the bearing.

Pull out

Spanner

Hex. head bolt

4-27

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


7 Rotate the gear counterclockwise and remove the gear.
Turn counterclockwise

Gear

8 Install the new gear in reverse order of the procedures above.


When installing, coat the gear teeth with the silicone grease.
(Use Silicone Grease G501 made by Shin-etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.)

4-28

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


4.9 Circulation Filter and Makeup Filter Replacement Procedure

1 Perform the procedures described in “4.1.2 Access to the parts on the front side of
equipment” and pull the Reservoir unit forward.
Nut
Replacement of circulation filter
2 Rotate the nut of the circulation filter and pull it out.
3 Remove the used O-ring and its filter and mount the new ones.
Circulation filter

Filter
O-ring

Makeup filter

CAUTION
If the ink was accidentally
spilled, quickly wipe it off
with wiping paper, etc. In
addition, do not close the
maintenance cover until you
confirm that the wiped part
Replacement of makeup filter Nut completely get dry.
2 Rotate the nut of the makeup filter
and pull it out.
3 Remove the used O-ring and its filter Filter
by tweezers and mount the new ones.
O-ring

4 Reset the circulation filter time and/or the makeup filter time to "0" on the “Parts usage
time management” screen.(Second page of the circulation control screen)

4-29

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


4.10 Ink Reservoir/Makeup Reservoir Replacement Procedure

4.10.1 Ink Reservoir replacement

1 Drain ink from the ink reservoir.


Connect the recovery tube to waste bottle.
Execute “Reservoir Ink-Drainage” and drain the ink from the ink reservoir.
[Caution] In case that the ink doesn't come out from the ink reservoir even when
"Reservoir InkDrainage" is executed, which may be caused by malfunction of the part
such as the solenoid valve or the pump, remove the ink reservoir in the step [5] below and
drain the ink into a beaker out of the ink reservoir's opening for attaching the sensor block.
At the ink drainage, put wiping paper under the beaker for possible ink dripping.
If there is still ink remaining in the ink cartridge bottle, do NOT lift the lever handle.

2 Turn off the power supply.

3 Perform “4.1.2 Access to the parts on the front side of the equipment” and draw out the
reservoir unit.
[Caution] Be careful not to catch the tubes.

4 Remove the sensor block from the ink reservoir.

Ink cartridge Sensor block

Ink reservoir

5 Remove the fixing screws (2 positions) and remove the ink reservoir.

6 Lift the lever handle and remove the ink cartridge.

Lever handle

Fixing screws Ink reservoir


4-30

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


7 Remove the fixing screws (2 positions) and take out the inner cover (INK).

Inner cover (INK)

Fixing screws

8 Clean the portion stained with ink and then install the new ink reservoir in reverse order
of the procedures above.
[Caution] When installing the Ink reservoir, put the hook of the Ink reservoir into the
hole of the Reservoir base first.

Ink reservoir
Ink reservoir
Hook

Hook Reservoir base

Reservoir base

4-31

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


4.10.2 Makeup Reservoir replacement

1 Drain makeup from the makeup Reservoir. Execute “Reservoir Makeup Drainage” and
drain the makeup from the makeup reservoir.
[Caution] In case that the makeup doesn't come out from the makeup reservoir even
when "Reservoir Makeup Drainage" is executed, which may be caused by malfunction
of the part such as the solenoid valve or the pump, remove the makeup reservoir in the
step [5] below and drain the makeup into a beaker out of the makeup reservoir's opening
for attaching the sensor block. At the makeup drainage, put wiping paper under the
beaker for possible makeup dripping.If there is still makeup remaining in the makeup
cartridge bottle, do NOT lift the lever handle.

2 Turn off the power supply.

3 Perform the procedures described in “4.1.2 Access to the parts on the front side of the
equipment” and pull the reservoir unit forward.
[Caution] Be careful not to catch the tubes.

4 Remove the Sensor block from the Makeup reservoir.


[Caution] When removing the Sensor block, be careful not to have an impact on the
sensor nor vibration

Sensor block Makeup cartridge Sensor block

Sensor

5 Remove the Fixing screws (2 positions9 and remove the Makeup Reservoir.

6 Lift the lever handle and remove the Makeup Cartridge.

Lever handle

Fixing screws Makeup reservoir

4-32

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


7 Remove the Fixing screws of Inner cover(SOL) (2 positions) and remove the Inner
cover (SOL).

Inner cover (SOL)

Fixing screws

8 Clean the area stained with ink and the install the new Makeup Reservoir in reverse
order of the procedures above.
[Caution] When installing the Makeup Reservoir, out the hook of the Makeup
reservoir into the hole of the Reservoir base first.

Makeup reservoir Reservoir base Makeup reservoir Reservoir base

Hook
Hook

4-33

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


4.11 Solenoid Replacement Procedure

The replacement solenoid (color of wiring:Orange) can be used for both solenoids of
Ink-side and makeup-side.
[Caution]
・Please do not mix up solenoid connectors of ink-side and makeup-side when you
connect them.
・After replacement, please cofirm that the solenoid on ink-side and/or Makeup-side
operates properly.
・Do NOT spill makeup over the solenoids.

1 Turn off the power supply.

2 Follow the procedures described in “4.1.2 Access to the parts on the front side of the
equipment” and pull the Reservoir unit out.

3 Remove the Fixing screw and remove Main ink tank.


[Caution] Be careful not to tip Main ink tank over.

Main ink tank

Fixing screw

4 Remove the fixing screws (2 positions) and remove the Makeup reservoir.

Fixing screws Makeup reservoir


5 Remove the Solenoid cable from the hook on the Inner cover(B).

Hook

Solenoid cable

Inner cover(B)

[Caution] Pay attention NOT to pinch the Solenoid Cable while above work is implemented.
4-34

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


6 Remove the Fixing screws(1) (2 pieces) and remove the solenoid unit.

7 Remove the Fixing screws(2) (2 pieces) and remove the solenoid cover.

8 Remove the Fixing screws(3) (2 pieces each) of the Solenoid to be replaced, and
remove the solenoid.
Fixing screws(1) Fixing screws(3)

Solenoid unit

Lock pin Lock pin


Solenoid cover Fixing screws(2) Solenoid (Makeup side) Solenoid (Ink side)

9 Follow the procedures described in “4.1.3 Access to the parts on the rear side of
equipment”, “(1) Access method from the front” and open the unit door.
[Caution] Be careful not to catch the tubes.
10 Remove the Solenoid connector of the Solenoid to be replaced, and remove the
solenoid cable.

Mark No. Cable color


Ink side 13 Orange
Makeup side 14 Yellow

Solenoid connector
Pump unit

11 Put a new solenoid in reverse order of the procedures above.


Route the solenoid cable to the hook of the inner cover (B).
(Refer to the figure in step 5 for how to route the Solenoid Cable.)
[Caution] When you install the solenoid, do NOT pinch the wirings.
・Color of solenoid cable of maintenance part is orange only and it is compatible with
solenoid 13 and 14.
However be sure NOT to mix up two solenoids.

4-35

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


12 Installing the new Makeup Reservoir in reverse order of the procedures above.
[Caution] When installing the Makeup Reservoir, confirm that the Solenoid Cable is
routed to the hook of the inner cover(B).
When installing the Makeup Reservoir, out the hook of the Makeup reservoir
into the hole of the Reservoir base first.

Makeup reservoir Makeup reservoir Reservoir base


Reservoir base

Hook

Hook ケーブルの噛み込みに注意してください。

13 On Solenoid valve/Pump test screen, confirm that the solenoid of ink-side or


Makeup-side operates properly.
(Lock engaged:Lock pin comes OUT; Lock Released:Lock Pin pulled IN)

4-36

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


4.12 Troubleshooting when Fault Occurs in Viscometer
Follow the troubleshooting steps below when the error occurs in viscometer.
[Caution] If “Viscosity Reading Instability” or “Viscosity Readings Out of Range” is
occurred , the IJP will automatically switch to the dot count system and operate.

(1) Viscosity Reading Instability


・ Phenomenon: Some unevenness occurred in 5-times measurement results of fall
time. (The difference between the maximum and minimum values
of fall time exceeded 10% of average value.)
・ Estimated cause: Entrance of foreign object
Troubleshooting:(a) Retry “calibration”. If the fault is not recovered, proceed to (b).
(b) Disassemble and clean viscometer. Proceed to (c) if no
recovery is made.
(c) Replace viscometer.
(2) Viscosity Readings Out of Range
・ Estimated cause: Ink adhered to the IN-side of viscometer.
Troubleshooting: Disassemble and wash viscometer.
・ Estimated cause: Proximity sensor was faulty.
Troubleshooting: Replace the proximity sensor.
If there is no recovery with the above troubleshooting, replace the viscometer.
(3) Inside Temperature Too High
・ Cause: Thermistor was faulty.
Troubleshooting: Confirm the connection of connector and/or replace the thermistor.

4.12.1 Viscometer removal procedure


[Caution] Disposing of ink is not necessary.

Viscometer

Fixing screws

1 Removing the viscometer IN-side tube


(A) Follow the procedures described in “4.1.2 Access to the parts on the front side of
the equipment” and make the viscometer visible.
(B) Release the viscometer IN-side tube (mark G) from the clamp.
(C) Turn the lock nut to remove it.

4-37

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


(D) Pull out the viscometer IN-side tube (mark G) from viscometer.
[Caution] The ink in tube will slightly drip: Fit wiping paper to the end of tube. No
reverse flow of ink will occur inside the viscometer.
(E) Immediately lift the end of removed tube higher than the level of liquid in the main ink
tank, and then keep this for at least 10 seconds to return the ink in tube to the main
ink tank.
(F) When the ink has drained from tube and air enters in it, release your hand from the
tube. When air enters the tube, no reverse flow of ink will occur even if the tube hangs
down.

2 Disposing of ink inside viscometer


Remove any ink remaining inside before removing the viscometer.
(A) Turn power on.
(B) Use “Solenoid Valve/Pump Test” screen of “Maintenance menu” to turn on the pump
to MV4 in that order, and operate them for at least 10 seconds. (The ink remaining
in viscometer will return to the main ink tank.)
(C) Turn power off.

3 Unplugging connectors
[Caution] Do not perform this work with power turned on: Doing so will cause
“Viscometer Temperature Sensor Fault” to occur.
Unplug the connectors of lead wires at the back of circulation unit, and pull them
out forward through the edge saddle.
Proximity sensor: 4-pin; Thermistor: 2-pin (blue/black); Coil: 2-pin (blue/blue)

4 Removing viscometer
Remove the two setscrews from viscometer, and then pull the viscometer out
forward.
[Caution] Pay extra attention to remove O-ring. The O-ring might remain in the
circulation unit.

4-38

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


4.12.2 Disassembling and washing viscometer
1 Remove the three setscrews from viscometer cover, and then remove the cover.

2 Place the viscometer upside down while applying wiping paper to the plunger, and then
remove the plunger. (Let all of the ink remaining in viscometer seep out to the wiping
paper.)

3 Make sure that no ink remains in viscometer, and then pull out the cylinder. (If ink remains,
it will soil the coil.)

4 Put the plunger and the cylinder which are removed, in a beaker filled with makeup, and
wash them for at least 5 minutes using an ultrasonic washer.

Viscometer cover

Thermistor setscrew

Three viscometer
cover setscrews
Thermistor
Viscometer cover

Coil

Cylinder
Viscometer case
Plunger

Viscometer-Out
Viscometer IN joint

4-39

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


4.12.3 Viscometer assembly procedure
1 Replace the cylinder, and then insert the plunger. Handle the plunger with tweezers
making sure that no dust adheres to the surface of plunger.

2 Set the collar to cylinder, paying extra attention to its orientation (with the convex up).

3 Make sure that the O-ring is set in the viscometer cover, and then assemble the cover into
the viscometer case.

4 Attach the three viscometer setscrews and tighten them. (Tighten the screws with
reasonable force using screwdriver. Tightening the screws excessively will break the
threads.)

O-ring

Viscometer case
O-ring Thermistor
Viscometer cover
Viscometer IN joint

Plunger
Fixing
Cylinder Collar plate
Coil O-ring

Viscometer-Out

Viscometer-IN

4.12.4 Viscometer attaching procedure


1 Set the O-ring on the viscometer OUT side, and use the setscrews (2 pieces) to attach the
viscometer to the circulation unit.

2 Plug in the connectors.

3 Connect the viscometer IN-side tube (mark G).

[Caution] After reassembly, it may be necessary to replace the ink and/or calibrate the
viscometer.
When disassembling and washing during installation:
Calibrate the viscometer. Ink replacement is NOT required.
When replacing the viscometer during installation:
Calibrate the viscometer. Ink replacement is NOT required.
When replacing the viscometer in cases other than installation:
First replace the ink, then calibrate the viscometer.

4-40

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


4.12.5 Replacing thermistor
1 Remove the viscometer from circulation unit, referring to item 4.12.1.

2 Remove the screw (1 pc) holding the thermistor fixing plate, and then replace the
thermistor.
[Caution] When installing the new thermistor, moisten the O-ring with makeup to prevent it
from being damaged.

3 Return the viscometer to its original position, referring to item 4.12.4.


[Caution] After replacing the thermistor, it is necessary to replace the ink and
calibrate the viscometer (see “2.6 Calibration of viscometer”).

4-41

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


4.13 Print Head Replacement Procedure

1 Carry out “Ink drainage.”


2 Turn off the power supply.

3 Open the maintenance cover and remove the print head connectors (5 locations) in the
control area.
CN5 CN4 High voltage line

FG line
CN7

CN2

4 Remove the side cover and FG line of the print head.


Fixing screws (4 locations) 【The inside of a side cover】
【UX-D/E】 【UX-B】

FG line of
printhead
located on
the downside

5 Remove the piping connections with the print head (4 positions).


(Loosen the tube lock and pull out the tube.) (5 position for UX-E)
[Caution] Apply wiping paper at the ends of the tubes for ink dripping.

Recovery line (upper) Recovery filter


(Mark A)

Supply line
(Mark E)
Makeup line Recovery line (UX-E only) Circulation line
(Mark R) (Mark 7) (Mark J)
4-42

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


6 Remove the tubes (4 pieces) which were just removed, from the plastic clamps on the main body wall.
Also, the Twist-Locks (2 pieces) as shown in the figure below shall be removed.
[Note] Please pay extra attention NOT to lose the removed Twist-Lock (Cable Fastener). For
reassembling, refer to <Cautions when Recovery filter base is removed> described in step 4 of
“4.1.2 Access to the parts on the front side of the equipment”.

Twist-Lock (Cable Fastener, 2 pieces)

7 Remove the tubes which were removed from the fixing clamps.

8 Perform “4.1.3 Access to the parts on the rear side of the equipment”
and open the unit door.

9 Remove the back cover.


Back cover

Fixing screws (11 pieces)

These two screws can only be Loosened

10 Rotate the Head H Clamp assembly by 45 degrees and pull the Head H Clamp
Assembly out.

Head H Clamp

4-43

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


11 Widen the Claws of Head H Clamp assembly and remove it from the harness of
the print head.
Head H Clamp assembly

FG line (Green)

High voltage line


(White) 14-wire cable (Black)
[the thickest cable]
Excitation line (Black)
Cable Mark No. 5
Video signal line(Black) APH line(Black)
Claws line(Black) Cable Mark No. 2
Cable Mark No. 3
[Note] Refer to the figures above when you mount the wires and cables.

12 Remove the print head fixing screws (4 locations) on the rear of the unit and
remove the print head cable from the unit.

Fixing screws

Print Head cable

Fixing screws
13 Mount the new print head by reverse order of the procedures above.

Use Head H Clamp assembly which you removed bundling

with new Print Head assembly Parts RX2.

14-wire cable shall be placed at the most right end.

[NOTE] When Head H Clamp is mounted to the printer, please mount it as 14-wire cable
(the thickest cable) shall be placed at the most right end when viewed from the rear of
the printer. Please see the figure above.

14 Perform “Ink Replenishment” and adjust the pressure.


Make sure that there is no ink leak.

15 Perform “Excitation adjustment” and “Auto-phase gain adjustment”.


4-44

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


4.14 Troubleshooting Procedure for the Circulation System
Perform “(1) Fault locating and repairing method” for each trouble symptom.
For the items marked * in “Probable Cause”, perform “(2) Fault locating method for the control
system/circulation system” to make sure that the control system is normal, and then perform the repair
work.

(1) Fault locating and repairing method


Trouble
Probable cause Status check Repairing method
symptom
* The motor The motor does not
Replace the motor.
malfunctions. rotate.
A crack or powder
The drive cam
abrasion is found on Replace drive unit
is damaged.
the cam.
The follow The piston cannot Replace supply pump
operation of the follow the cam
The supply stroke is faulty. motion. head
pump The solenoid valve is When the fault is not
malfunctions Foreign operated but recovered by repeating
. materials are charging and “startup” and
mixed in the drainage are not “shutdown”, replace the
check valve. completed within the supply pump head.
specified time.
The solenoid valve is Refer to “4.15
The check
operating but ink Repairing method
valve is dry or
does not flow. when the circulation
sticks.
route is dry or sticks”.
When “Open” is Replace or repair the
Ink does
executed on solenoid valve (MV1).
not eject.
* MV1 “Solenoid Refer to “4.15
malfunctions. Valve/Pump Test” Repairing method
The solenoid screen, no operation when the circulation
valve sound is produced. route is dry or sticks”.
malfunctions When “Open” is
. executed on
* MV9 “Solenoid Replace the solenoid
malfunctions. Valve/Pump Test” valve (MV9).
screen, no operation
sound is produced.
The operation sound Refer to “4.15
Clogging in the of MV1 and MV9 is Repairing method
pipe or joint. produced, but ink when the circulation
does not flow. route is dry or sticks”.
The supply
When backwash
route clogs.
conducted, makeup Clean the orifice plate
Clogging in the
does not flow to the with ultrasonic
orifice plate.
tube of circulation cleaning.
route.
The makeup
Follow the same descriptions as those of “The supply pump
pump
malfunctions" above. However, replace the makeup pump
malfunctions
head instead.
.
Makeup
When “Open” is
does not
The solenoid executed on
eject.
valve * MV8 “Solenoid Replace the solenoid
malfunctions malfunctions. Valve/Pump Test” valve (MV8).
. screen, no operation
sound is produced.

4-45

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Symptom Probable cause Check method Repairing method
The supply
pump Follow the same descriptions as those of “Ink does not eject".
malfunctions.
When “Open” is Replace or repair the
executed on “Solenoid solenoid valve (MV1).
* MV1 Valve/Pump Test” Refer to “4.15 Repairing
malfunctions. screen, no operation method when the
sound is produced. circulation route dry or
sticks”.
When “Open” is Replace or repair the
executed on “Solenoid solenoid valve (MV2).
* MV2 Valve/Pump Test” Refer to “4.12 Repairing
malfunctions. screen, no operation method when the
The ink The solenoid sound is produced. circulation route dry or
pressure valve sticks”.
does not malfunctions. When “Open” is
increase. executed on “Solenoid
* MV9 Replace the solenoid
Valve/Pump Test”
malfunctions. valve (MV9).
screen, no operation
sound is produced.
When the pump and
then MV1 are turned on,
The pressure
ink flows to the collation Replace the solenoid
resistance of MV6
tube. (Solenoid valve (MV6).
is faulty.
Valve/Pump Test
screen)
Ink ejects and printing
* The pressure
can be performed but Replace the pressure
Others sensor
the pressure value is sensor.
malfunctions.
abnormal.
The makeup in the pipe
N is sucked even during
The pressure operation (except at
Replace the solenoid
resistance of MV7 supply). (Remove the
valve (MV7).
is faulty. tube connection block of
the makeup reservoir
and check.)
Ink Over Fill The solenoid The pressure The makeup ejects and
Replace the solenoid
often valve resistance of MV8 cannot be stopped “at
valve (MV8).
occurs. malfunctions. is faulty. non-cleaning stop”.
The ink in the pipe M is
sucked even during
The pressure operation (except at
Replace the solenoid
resistance of MV2 supply). (Remove the
valve (MV2).
is faulty. tube connection block of
the ink reservoir and
check.)

4-46

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Symptom Probable cause Check method Repairing method
The recovery
Follow the same descriptions as those of “The supply pump
pump
malfunctions ".
malfunctions.
When “Open” is Replace or repair the
executed on solenoid valve (MV3).
The solenoid * MV3
“Solenoid Refer to “4.15
valve
Valve/Pump Test” Repairing method
malfunctions. malfunctions.
screen, no operation when the circulation
sound is produced. route is dry or sticks”.
Clogging in A lot of foreign
Replace the recovery
the recovery materials stick on
No filter.
filter the recovery filter.
recovery
Press makeup into the
end of the recovery
filter connecting tube
The recovery Suck is performed by applying pressure
route clogs. Clogging in when the tube with a hand pump.
the pipe or connected to the - Hand pump
joint recovery filter is specifications
removed. Part name:
Nozzle cleaning
assembly
Part No.: 451000
The
circulation Follow the same descriptions as those of “The supply pump
pump malfunctions ".
malfunctions.
When “Open” is Replace or repair the
executed on solenoid valve (MV4).
The solenoid
A * MV4 “Solenoid Refer to “4.15
valve
viscometer malfunctions. Valve/Pump Test” Repairing method
malfunctions
error screen, no operation when the circulation
occurs. sound is produced. route is dry or sticks”.
The nozzle can be Refer to “4.15
The Clogging in
flushed reversely Repairing method
circulation the pipe or
and MV4 can be when the circulation
route clogs. joint
operated normally. route is dry or sticks”.
Viscometer In cases other than three cases Replace the
failure above. viscometer”.
The
circulating Follow the same descriptions as those of “The supply pump
pump malfunctions ".
malfunctions.
Backwash
When “Open” is Replace or repair the
is
executed on solenoid valve (MV5).
impossible. The solenoid * MV5
“Solenoid Refer to “4.15
valve
Valve/Pump Test” Repairing method
malfunctions. malfunctions.
screen, no operation when the circulation
sound is produced. route is dry or sticks”.
The When “Open” is Replace or repair the
pressure executed on solenoid valve (MV2).
The solenoid * MV2
drops “Solenoid Refer to “4.15
valve
during Valve/Pump Test” Repairing method
malfunctions. malfunctions.
normal screen, no operation when the circulation
operation. sound is produced. route is dry or sticks”.

4-47

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Symptom Probable cause Check method Repairing method
The supply
pump Follow the same descriptions as those of “Ink does not eject”.
malfunctions.
When “Open” is
Replace or repair the
executed on
solenoid valve (MV6).
The solenoid “Solenoid
Charging or * MV6 Refer to “4.15
valve Valve/Pump Test”
drainage is malfunctions. Repairing method when
malfunctions. screen, no
impossible. the circulation route is
operation sound is
dry or sticks”.
produced.
Refer to “4.15
The Clogging in
In cases other than Repairing method when
circulation the pipe or
two cases above. the circulation route is
route clogs. joint
dry or sticks”.
When “Operated” of
pump and then
“Open” of MV1 and Refer to “4.15
Ink supply
MV6 are executed Repairing method when
pump is
on “Solenoid valve / the circulation route is
clogged.
pump test” screen, dry or sticks”.
the ink does not
flow.
When “Open” is
Replace or repair the
executed on
solenoid valve (MV2).
* MV2 “Solenoid
Refer to “4.15
During Ink malfunctions Valve/Pump Test”
Repairing method when
Refill, the . screen, no
the circulation route is
message operation sound is
dry or sticks”.
“Failure produced.
was It takes too When “Open” is
Replace or repair the
detected in long to supply executed on
solenoid valve (MV7).
level ink or * MV7 “Solenoid
Refer to “4.15
sensor, makeup to malfunctions Valve/Pump Test”
Repairing method when
pump, or the main ink . screen, no
the circulation route is
solenoid tank. operation sound is
dry or sticks”.
valve” is produced.
displayed Refer to “6.2.8
The initial
on the Makeup
level can not -
screen. Replenishment
be detected.
Timeout”.
Check the
Full of air in Execute the Ink refill
circulation line M
the tubes. again.
with eyes.
Check if the
warning message,
Ink or makeup
“Ink Low Warning”
in each Replenish ink or
or “Makeup Low
reservoir is in makeup and restart.
Warning” is
short supply.
displayed on the
screen.

4-48

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


(2) Fault locating method for the control system/circulation system
(a) When the pump motor and all the solenoid valves are not operated, the multi-power supply
(24 V system) is abnormal.
(b) If the electrical parts (pump motor, solenoid valves, and pressure sensor) are not operated, i,e.,
any case other than above, make the following checks first. When the criterion is satisfied, the
power supply, EZJ126 board, wiring, or connector is abnormal.

Part Check method Criterion


Pump motor (1) Operate the pump 20 V DC or more
on the “Solenoid
Valve/Pump Test”
screen.
(2) Measure the
voltage at pin
No.5 (wire: red)
Solenoid valve (1) Exchange the An operation sound shall be
solenoid valve produced.
and/or the
connector with
another normal
solenoid valve
and/or connector.
(2) Set the solenoid
value to “Open” on
the “Solenoid
Valve/Pump Test”
screen and check
the sound.
Pressure sensor Measure the voltage DC12V±10%
at pin No.1
(wire: yellow)
Measure the voltage Pressure Output
at pin No.3 (wire: [MPa] voltage [V]
blue) when the ink is 0.1 1.5 to 1.6
jetting. 0.2 2.1 to 2.2
0.3 2.7 to 2.8

4-49

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


4.15 Repairing Method When the Circulation Route Is Dry or Sticks
4.15.1 How to restore operation when solenoid valve seizure is stuck.
1 Turn off the power.
2 Perform “4.1.3 Access to the parts on the rear side of the equipment” and open
the unit door.
[Caution] Be careful not to catch the tubes.
3 Insert M2 screw (M2 x 25 or longer) from the hole at the top of the solenoid valve, rotate
2 or 3 turns and connect to the M2 screw hole formed on the moving plunger inside the
solenoid valve.
Solenoid
M2 screw

4 Hold the head of the M2 screw with a pair of tweezers, etc., and pull up the moving
plunger. (Peel the “stuck” by pulling the moving plunger upward.)
Pull UP
M2 screw

5 Operate the concerned solenoid valve on the “Solenoid valve / pump test” screen for 10
times or so.
If the operation sound is confirmed, then restoration is complete.
If operation cannot be restored, replace the solenoid valve.
4.15.2 Repairing method for the supply pump
1 Remove the tube connecting block of the ink reservoir, and then remove CV assembly.
After that, connect handpump with makeup in it to the pipe M.
CV Assembly

Hand pump specifications


Pipe M
Part name : Nozzle cleaning assembly
Parts No :451000

Pipe

Hand pump

2 Operate the pump, MV2, and MV6 in this order on the “Solenoid
Valve/Pump Test” screen.
3 Apply pressure with the hand pump.
4 If the makeup in the hand pump flows to the pipe M, the repair work is completed.
If the supply pump cannot be repaired in about 10 minutes, replace the pump unit.
[Caution] Be sure to attach CV assembly when all the removed parts are reassembled.

4-50

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


4.15.3 Repairing method for the makeup pump
1 Remove the tube connecting block of makeup reservoir, and then connect
the cleaning bottle to the pipe of pipe N.
(You can apply pressure more easily by putting a tube between the pipe
and the cleaning bottle.)

Cleaning bottle

Pipe

Pipe N

2 Operate the pump and then MV7 on the “Solenoid Valve/Pump Test” screen.

3 Apply pressure with the cleaning bottle.

4 When the makeup of the hand pump flows to the pipe N, the repair work is completed.
If the pump cannot be repaired with the cleaning bottle, use the hand pump.
(Refer to 4.15.2 Repairing method for the supply pump.)
Such a hard sticking which cannot be repaired with the hand pump will not occur.

4.15.4 Procedure for repairing the circulation pump


1 Start the circulation pump by “Start up” or “Eject ink”.

2 When the circulation pump is started, operate it for about 10 minutes with the pressure
adjusting screw turned completely clockwise to obtain the maximum pressure.

3 Stop the pump and then execute “Nozzle Backwash”. If suction from the nozzle is
confirmed, the repair work is completed. If the pump is not repaired, repeat the same
operations starting from 1 again. If the pump cannot be repaired after these steps of 1 2
3, 2 or 3 times, replace the pump unit.

4.15.5 Procedure for repairing the recovery pump


1 Operate the pump, MV1, and MV6 in this order on the “Solenoid Valve/Pump Test”
screen.
2 Operate the pump with the pressure adjustment screw turned completely
clockwise to obtain the maximum pressure.
3 If the ink flows into the recovery tube, the repair work is completed.
If the pump cannot be repaired by pump operation for 10 minutes, replace the pump unit.

4-51

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


4.16 Maintenance work of intake fan unit

4.16.1 Structure of Intake fan unit


Intake fan cover

Thumbscrew

Air filter

Intake fan unit assembly


Intake fan Intake fan cover assembly

4.16.2 Replacement of Intake fan unit

1 Turn off the power.

2 Loosen the thumbscrew and remove the Intake fan cover.

Intake fan cover

Thumbscrew (2 locations)

3 Remove the Air filter.


[Note] The Air filter has front and rear faces.
Set the filter with red-mark being invisible.

Air filter
(Red-mark in rear)

4-52

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


4 Remove the Fastening screws (4 locations) of the Intake fan unit assembly.

Fastening screws
(4 locations)

Intake fan unit assembly

5 Disengage the Intake fan harness, connector and remove the Intake fan unit assembly.

Intake fan harness connector

冷却ユニットクミ
Intake fan unit assembly

Intake fan cover assembly

6 Remove the Fastening screws (4 locations) of Intake fan cover assembly.

Fastening screws (4 locations)

7 Pull out the harness and remove the Intake fan unit from two positioning bosses.

Harness routing

Positioning bosses (two locations)

8 Install the new Intake fan unit by reverse order of the procedures above.

4-53

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


4.17 R Air filter Replacement Procedure
[Replacement interval]
- The replacement interval of the R air filter is about 4800 hours as standard, but
the actual replacement interval varies by the printer’s operating environment
condition. Replace the R Air filter at the same time with the air filter (in every
two times).

1 Turn off the power supply.


2 Remove the exhaust cover.

Exhaust cover
Fixing screws (4 locations)

3 Remove the fixing screws (4 locations), the filter cover and the R air filter.

R air filter

Filter cover

*Red mark

Exhaust cover

Filter cover
Fixing screws (4 locations)

Stainless wire mesh filter

4 Install the new R air filter by reverse order of the procedures above.

Caution

The R Air filter has front and rear faces.


Place the red mark side toward the Exhaust cover.

4-54

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


5 Reset the time of the R air filter to 0 on the “Parts usage time management” screen.

4-55

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


4.18 Check on Exhaust Duct dripping
The exhaust contains the vapor of makeup and it will be liquefied when cooled down.
Depending on the IJP’s installation environment, there will be a case that there is a big
difference between IJP’s inside temperature and the operating temperature.
When IJP is installed or when IJP is serviced at periodical maintenance, please check the
items below:

(1) Is there any wiring routed around the exhaust duct, such as the power cord, the electrical
signal wirings, etc.? Should there be dripping the wire/cable coating may get cracked.
 Please reroute the wiring and call customer’s attention.

(2) Is there any track of the dripping?


 Please propose a tray for dripping to customer.
 There may be a possibility that the ink/makeup was supplied to the ink/makeup
reservoir more than needed and it overflowed from the reservoir’s vent and ran to the
exhaust duct. Please call customer’s attention.

4-56

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


4.19 Circulation system cleaning of printer which uses Ethanol-based ink
The Ethanol-based ink could be influenced by the environment where the printer is installed,
and it is likely to cause clogging of the filter compared to MEK-based ink.
The periodical replacement of the filters, and the periodical cleaning of the circulation system
with Makeup for MEK-based ink shall be conducted in order to maintain proper operation of
the printer.
Please refer to the cleaning procedures below, of the circulation system of the printer which
uses Ethanol-based ink.

(1) Prepare the following parts before starting the cleaning.

Part name Quantity Part code Note


Ink Cartridge 2 ― ―
Makeup Cartridge 1 ― ―
S100A 1 452016 Used for cleaning.
FILTER CAPSULE PARTS 1 451867
Nozzle flat filter 75 1 451037
PTFE filter 20 pack 2 1 451487 2 pieces /pack
MGV filter parts KX 1 451518 3 pieces/ pack

(2) Execute Ink Circulation system cleaning.


1 Execute Reservoir Makeup Drainage.
Press Maintenance → Circulation control → Reservoir Makeup Drainage.

2 Perform the procedures of 2 to 7 of “(2) Operating Procedure” of “6.16.1 Process prior to


long-term shutdown” in Technical Manual.
[Note] Use Makeup S100A for the procedure 6 - (a) of “(2) Operating Procedure” of “6.16.1
Process prior to long-term shutdown”.

(3) Replacing the ink filter.


Refer to “6.7 Replacing the ink filter” in Technical Manual.

(4) Replacing the recovery filter.


Refer to “6.8 Replacing the recovery filter” in Technical Manual.

(5) Circulation filter replacement.


Refer to 1 Replacement of circulation filter of “4.9. Circulation Filter and Makeup Filter
Replacement Procedure”.

(6) MGV filter replacement.


Refer to “5.4 MGV filter replacement”.

4-57

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


(7) Cleaning of Ink reservoir, Main ink tank and Viscometer.
1 If the ink reservoir is stained with ink, use makeup (S100A) to clean it.

2 Refer to “4.2.3 Removal method of the Main ink tank lid” for overhaul of the main ink tank.

3 Refer to “4.12.1 Viscometer removal procedure” and “4.12.2 Disassembling and washing
viscometer” for overhaul of viscometer.
After overhaul is completed, refer to “4.12.3 Viscometer assembly procedure”
and “4.12.4 Viscometer attaching procedure” to reassemble the viscometer.

(8) Drain the used makeup.


Execute Reservoir Makeup Drainage.
Press Maintenance → Ink Circulation → Reservoir Makeup Drainage.

(9) Set the Makeup cartridge for Ethanol-based ink.

(10) Perform the procedures which drain the remaining makeup (S100A) and refill with makeup
for Ethanol-based ink.
Perform the procedures of 2 to 6 of “(2) Operating Procedure” of “6.16.1 Process prior to
long-term shutdown” in Technical Manual.
Use the makeup for Ethanol-based ink at 6 - (a).

(11) Set the Ink cartridge.


Refer to “8.1 Replenishing the ink” in Instruction Manual.

(12) Execute ink refill.


Press Maintenance → Ink Circulation → Next Dsp. → Ink refill.

(13) Execute ink replacement.


Refer to “6.3 Replacing the ink” in Technical Manual.

4-58

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


4. 20 Cleaning of dedicated path for Low volatilization system (UX-E only)
• Periodical cleaning of the dedicated path for Low volatilization system shall be conducted
in order to maintain proper operation of the printer.
(It is recommended the cleaning is conducted at the time of periodical maintenance of the printer.)

1 While cleaning is conducted, the liquid will drip from the Printhead and the Exhaust duct.
Please make sure you conduct following tasks beforehand for preparation.

(a) Makeup will drip from the Printhead.


Remove the Printhead cover, and place
the tip of the Printhead into the beaker.

(b) Makeup will drip from the Exhaust duct.


Place a fluid pan or a wiping paper under the Exhaust duct.

Beaker

Exhaust duct
Fluid pan or wiping paper

2 Remove the Tube lock of the Exhaust tube (Piping [5] ) which is connected to the Main ink tank, and
connect the Piping [5] to Hand pump.

Exhaust tube (Piping [5])


Hand pump specifications
Part name: Nozzle cleaner
Part No: 451000

Exhaust tube (Piping [1])

Hand pump

4-59

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


3 Inject makeup into the Exhaust tube (Piping [5]) using Hand pump and clean the path.
• Inject the makeup until the liquid drips from the Air exhaust port.

Printhead cover locking thumbscrew

Air exhaust port

Charge electrode
Negative deflection electrode

Gutter

Nozzle orifice

Positive deflection electrode

4 Disconnect the Exhaust tube (Piping [5]) which is connected to the Hand pump, and reconnect the
tube to the Main ink tank.

5 Clean MV11 and the Exhaust path.


Remove the Tube lock of the Exhaust tube (Piping [1] ) which is connected to the Main ink tank, and
connect the Piping [1] to Hand pump.
• Press “Open” for MV11 on Solenoid valve/ pump test screen.

Exhaust tube (Piping [1]) Hand pump specifications


Part name: Nozzle cleaner
Part No: 451000

Hand pump

Exhaust tube (Piping [5])

4-60

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


6 Inject makeup into the Exhaust tube (Piping [1]) using Hand pump and clean the path.
• Inject the makeup until the liquid drips from the Air exhaust duct.

7 Disconnect the Exhaust tube (Piping [1]) which is connected to the Hand pump, and reconnect the
tube to the Main ink tank.

7 Conduct Air exhaust port backwash.


• Refer to “6.16.2 Air exhaust port backwash” in Technical Manual.

8 Drain the makeup in the dedicated path for Low volatilization system.
(a) Drain the liquid remaining between the Piping [5] and Printhead.
• Press “Open” for MV3 on Solenoid valve/Pump test screen.
(MV3 shall be opened for 5 to 10 minutes.)
(b) Drain the liquid remaining between the Piping [1] and Air exhaust duct.
• On Solenoid valve/Pump test screen, press “Operated” for Pump and press “Open” for MV3
and MV11.
(The “Solenoid valve/Pump test” shall be conducted for 2 to 5 minutes to drain the remaining
liquid in the Exhaust duct.)
(c) Wipe off any remaining liquid in the Exhaust duct, and the liquid dripping from
the Printhead and Exhaust duct. The cleaning process is now complete.

4-61

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


5. Print head related maintenance
5.1 Print head rough configuration
(1)UX-B/D

Coupling

Heating unit
connector

Shutoff valve
(MV9) connector

Cover
switch
connector
Heating unit Shutoff valve
(MV9)

Air purge
tube
Nozzle Cover switch
excitation
connector
Coupling cover Video signal
line
APH board

Nozzle Nozzle ground


APH sensor
Charge electrode High
Negative voltage
deflecting line
electrode Positive deflecting
electrode

APH shield plate

Gutter

5-1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


(2)UX-E

Coupling
Heating unit
connector

Shutoff valve
(MV9) connector
Heating unit
Cover
switch
connector
Mist
collector Shutoff valve
(MV9)

Air purge
tube
Nozzle
excitation
connector
3P Coupling Cover switch
Gas/liquid cover
separator
Video signal APH board
line
Nozzle
Nozzle ground

Charge electrode
Negative
deflecting Positive deflecting APH sensor
electrode electrode High
voltage
line
APH shield plate

Gutter

5-2

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


5.2 Cable running direction

The cable running direction can be changed as shown in the following figure. The customer should not attempt to
run the cable himself.
The cable should be run by a service technician.

1 Remove the 4 fastening screws.

Pull out the coupling approximately


10 mm.

Coupling

2 Turn 90°.

3 Tighten the 4 fastening screws.

5-3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


5.3 Gutter configuration and replacement method
5.3.1 Gutter configuration
Following configuration differs according to the type of machine

O-ring 1.6 With membrane

5.3.2 Replacement method

1 Remove the 2 fastening screws

2 The gutter base and APH shield plate


come off.

APH shield plate


*Note
The packing consists of a combination of 2 types.

O-ring 2.2

5-4

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


5.4 MGV filter replacement

1 Depressurize the printer.

2 Remove the head cover and


the heater cover.

MV9 filter

3 Remove the lead wire Air purge tube


of the nozzle and air purge
tube.

Lead wire

Coupling cover
4 Remove Screw A(1 location)
and remove the coupling cover.

MGV holder Nozzle-In


5 Remove Screw B(1 location)
Joint holder
and Screw C(2 locations).
Remove MGV holder and
nozzle-In joint holder.

5-5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


MV9
6 Lift the MV9.

7 (1)Remove the nozzle-IN joint from


the MV9 filter then remove O-ring 3.9.
MV9 filter
Fix a new MV9 filter and O-ring 3.9. Nozzle-IN joint
Perform the assembly after dipping the
O-ring in makeup, and confirm
that the O-ring does not
jump out of the hole.
O-ring 3.9
(2)Attach each cover.

5-6

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


5.5 Shutoff valve (MV9) replacement
1 Depressurize the printer.

2 Remove the head cover and


the heater cover.

3 Disassemble the shutoff


valve connector.

Shutoff valve connector


MV9

Air purge tube

4 Remove the nozzle lead wire


and the air purge tube.

Lead wire

Coupling cover

5 Remove Screw A(1 location)


and remove the coupling cover.

MGV holder Nozzle-In


6 Remove Screw B(1 location)
Joint holder
and Screw C(2 locations).
Remove MGV holder and
nozzle-In Joint holder.

5-7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


MV9
7 Take up the shutoff valve(MV9), remove the makeup
in joint and remove the shutoff valve (MV9).
When the O-ring (P2.2) is remained at the
heating unit, remove it.

8 (1)Put the MV9filter, O-ring3.9, O-ring2.2and O-ring1.7 into the respective holes
of the joint part.
Perform the assembly after dipping the O-ring in makeup, and
confirm that the O-ring does not jump out of the hole.

(2)Connect the makeup IN joint to the shutoff valve


and fix it to the boss on the heating unit.

(3)Put the makeup in joint in the groove of MGV holder.

(4)Attach the MGV holder and fix the shutoff valve.

(5)Put the MV9filter, O-ring3.9,nozzle-In-joint and nozzle-In joint presser foot.

(6)Assemble the shutoff valve connector.

(7)Spurt ink after the assembly and confirm that there is no leak from
each terminal area.

(8)Attach each cover. MG9 filter


Makeup in joint Nozzle-In joint

O-ring 3.9
O-ring 1.7
O-ring 2.2

5-8

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


5.6 Heating unit replacement
1 Depressurize the printer.

2 Remove the head cover and


the heater cover.

Air purge tube


3 Remove the nozzle lead wire
and the air purge tube.

Lead wire

4 (1)Remove Screw A(1 location)


and remove the coupling cover. Coupling cover
(2)Remove the heating unit joint presser
foot and remove the ink-supply tube(E)

Nozzle-In

5 Remove Screw B(1 location) Joint holder


MGV holder
and Screw C(2 locations).
Remove MGV holder and
nozzle-In Joint holder.

5-9

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


MV9

6 Remove the shutoff valve.(MV9)


(Refer to 5.5 Replacement
of shutoff valve)

7 Remove the 4 fastening screws


of the heating unit.
Heating unit
Remove the rear cover (8 screws)

8 Remove the connector and remove Heating unit


the heating unit.

Connector

9 Prepare a new heating unit and put an O-ring1.7 in the terminal area
of the ink-supply tube(E).
Perform the assembly after dipping the O-ring in makeup, and
confirm that the O-ring does not jump out of the hole.

10 Attach the heating unit.

5-10

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


5.7 APH board replacement

1 Remove the head base rear cover Fastening


APH board

2 Remove the APH board


fastening screw.

3 Slide approximately 4 mm.

4 Pull out.

Connector

Connector
5 Remove the connectors
(2 locations).

APH sensor

6 Remove the APH sensor


Gutter base

 When returning to the original state,


remove the gutter base, fasten the
APH board, and then re-attach the
gutter base (in order to enhance
O-ring assembly reliability of the O-ring 2.2
APH sensor).

7 Perform the automatic phase gain adjustment

5-11

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


5.8 Nozzle replacement
1 Depressurize the printer.

2 Remove the head cover and the heater cover.

3 Remove the excitation line from the 3P coupling cover and disconnect
the connector. Nozzle out joint
Nozzle

Nozzle excitation connector


Coupling cover

4 Remove the coupling cover fastening screw (B), the ground wire fastening
screw (D) and charge electrode fastening screw (C).

5 Cut the nozzle-side of Nozzle-out joint with cutter knife, etc.


“Caution” when removing the nozzle OUT joint, remove it so as not to pull the main
body side tube.

Main body side Nozzle side

Cut off this part

“Caution”
(1) If you scratch the coupling with a cutter or the knife, it may cause an ink leaking
and so on.

(2) When removing a cut piece of the tube, cut the tube piece and pull it off
the coupling.

5-12

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


6 Hold the tip of nozzle and remove the nozzle pulling it obliquely upward.

7 Attach a new nozzle and fix the nozzle setscrew, (2 locations), the nozzle IN joint
presser foot (shutoff valve side), the nozzle OUT joint and the excitation connector.
“Caution”
(1) Confirm that a filter is present in the terminal area (inside the shutoff valve)
of the nozzle In joint.
(2) Wet the insert portion inside the shutoff valve with the intensifier to make
it slippery and then, connect the nozzle IN joint.
“Caution”
If connection is imperfect, ink will below off.

8 Cut the recovery side tube of the new nozzle into a suitable length and connect the
nozzle OUT joint.
“Caution”
(1) Get rid of the tube remaining on the joint in the 5
(2) When the tube is hardly put in the joint because it slips, grasp the front edge
of the tube by a JK wiper or the like and put it in the joint.
9 Put the charged electrode in the new nozzle and fix the video signal wire on the
charged electrode.
10 Execute ink stream alignment on the circulation control screen.
“Caution”
(1) If you repeat ink stream alignment, it will be diluted. complete it by the third time.
11 Perform Excitation adjustment and Auto phase gain adjustment on the screen of
adjustment/operation checkout.

5-13

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


5.9 Nozzle Orifice Cleaning

1) Detergent to use for an ultrasonic cleaning 2)Procedures of the cleaning

The ultrasonic cleaning with the Nozzle Clogging or Ink Stream Bent occurred.
Weak-Alkali Detergent is effective for
the foreign objects of the nozzle orifice
which it is hard to remove with MEK or Eject the makeup *1 and confirm
the ink stream position if it is at
makeup.
the center of the gutter.

[About a Weak-Alkali Detergent] Problem IS Problem IS fixed. Problem is


fixed.
① Characteristic of the detergent Ejecting ink, confirm the stream NOT fixed.
position is almost the same as
Use household Weak-Alkali Detergent that of stream alignment.
on the market. (Detergent to clean a
ventilating fan, for example.) Problem is NOT fixed.
Generally, Detergent on the market is Remove the nozzle orifice plate. (Confirm if any
from 0.2 to 2 volume-% Weak-Alkali foreign object is attached by a microscope if
solution.
<Procedures of Ultrasonic Cleaning>
(1) Ultrasonic cleaning with MEK, or genuine Makeup to
② Labeling of articles on the market remove ink component and other soluble substances
in solvent.
(Example) (2) Drying by air blow or leaving it for 3 to 5 minutes to
remove the solvent on the nozzle orifice surface.
・Liquid properties : (3) Ultrasonic cleaning with Weak-Alkali Detergent for
[Slightly-Alkaline, 30 minutes to remove the foreign objects that cannot
Mildly-Alkaline or Alkalescent] be removed by MEK or Makeup. (See (1) above.)
・Ingredient : (4) Ultrasonic cleaning with water (pure water) *2 for 3
[Surface Acting Agent] minutes to rinse off Weak-Alkali surface active agent.
・Concentration :[0.2% - 1%] (5) Ultrasonic cleaning with ethanol for 3 minutes to
・pH :[In the range of pH8 – pH11] remove moisture by dissolving it in ethanol.
(6) Drying by air blow or leaving it for 3 to 5 minutes.
③ Precautions for use
・In case the liquid concentration is Problem IS
0.2% - 1%, Use the detergent as it fixed. Set the orifice plate to the
is, UNDILUTED. nozzle, eject Makeup *1 and
・In case the liquid concentration is confirm the ink stream position if
1% or higher, dilute by approx. it is at the center of the gutter.
0.2%-1% with water.
・Follow the PRECAUTIONS FOR USE Problem is NOT fixed.
Problem IS
and DISPOSAL of the article fixed. Repeat <Procedures of ultrasonic
purchased. cleaning> and confirm stream position.
(MAX 2 Times allowed.)
Problem is NOT fixed.
Continue operation. Change the orifice to
the spare part.

*1 Procedure to eject the makeup.


Execute the Ink stream alignment in the 2nd page of
Circulation control menu.
*2
TH-TYPE A is all right in substitution for pure water.
MEK is impossible of a substitute.

5-14

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


3)The efficient way to use the ultra-sonic cleaning machine

The efficient way to use the ultra-sonic cleaning machine for ultra-sonic cleaning of the nozzle orifice

1: How to find the optimum cleaning position


When the orifice is cleaned by the ultra-sonic cleaning machine, the aluminum foil can be used as a good trial
sample to find the right position to place the nozzle orifice in the machine.
As shown in the Figure 1 below, when the aluminum foil is put in the ultra-sonic cleaning machine then pulled out
and observed, spots where the surface status of the aluminum foil changes show up as in Photo 1. *1*2
The spots where the surface status is changed (the spots where the “holes” are in Photo 1) are the location
(height) where the ultra-sonic cleaning is made most effectively. Therefore, to conduct the ultrasonic-cleaning
effectively, the height should be adjusted by using the jig as shown in the Photo 2, prior to ultra-sonic cleaning.
*1 the change of the aluminum foil surface may be influenced by the liquid level of the cleaning tank.
If NO change is made to the aluminum foil, lower/increase the liquid level then check the status
of the surface again.
*2 If the frequency of the ultra-sonic cleaning machine reaches 45 kHz, the change in surface of the
aluminum foil may not appear.

Aluminum foil
Inner
tank
Water Cavitation is
working efficiently.
Cleaner (Holes may be
created.)
Cleaning
tank

Figure 1. Example-Placing aluminum


foil in the ultra-sonic cleaning machine
Photo 1. Status of aluminum foil after
1 –minute ultra –sonic cleaning

2: Notice, etc.
1. The material of the inner tank should NOT be made of resin. Either SUS or Glass is preferred.
Its thickness shall be thin. (Because the sound wave is absorbed [reduced].)
2. The up-and-down oscillation in the inner tank may work effectively if the optimal location (height) is unknown.
3. The opening of the orifice shall face down.
(The sound wave is attenuated by orifice’s own thickness.
It is preferred that the position you wish to clean
be placed facing the bottom of the cleaning tank.) Orifice opening
face down.

△ ○
4. Note that the ultra-sonic cleaning shows NO effect if there is air in the opening of the orifice.
5. The unevenness in cleaning strength exists in the horizontal direction in the cleaning tank.
Normally, it tends to be stronger in the center. By changing the horizontal position of the aluminum foil and
understanding the characteristics of the cleaning, the position to place the orifice can be optimized.
Because of the diffuse reflection, it is not always the case that the cavitations occurs only at the theoretical
positions. (By using the aluminum foil, the positions can be found anyway.)

5-15

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


5.10 Mist collector maintenance(applied UX-E only)
1 Remove head cover and heater cover.

2 Unscrew the fixing screw of coupling cover, and then remove the coupling cover.

Fixing screw of coupling cover (1 location)

Mist collector

3 Remove the nut of the mist collector, and then using tweezers, take out O-ring and
the filter from inside. After that, attach a new O-ring P-6EPT and a new PTFE filter
F-20-8.8.

Mist collector
Housing

O-ring P-EPT

PTFE filter
Nut F20-8.8
*Using two 8 mm wrenches, hold
housing by one wrench and remove the nut
by the other wrench.

[Structure of mist collector] Housing


O-ring P-EPT

Nut
PTFE filter F20-8.8
4 Attach the removed nut to mist collector, and then attach all removed parts in the
reverse order of the procedures above.

5-16

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


5.11 Thermistor replacement
1 Remove the four (4) fixing screws, and then pull out the coupling to the direction of the arrow.
Fixixng screws
(2 pieces)

Coupling

Fixixng screws (2 pieces)

2 Remove the banding band and the packing.

[Caution]
Before removing the banding band and the packing, put a mark on the tube by a tape, etc. as the guide
for reassembling the new ones.

Banding band
[UX-D, B] Packing

Tube (transparent)

Thermistor
Coupling
Put a mark here

[UX-E]
Banding bands (2 locations)

Packing Tube (transparent)


Put a mark here

5-17

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


3 Remove the thermistor connector.
White wire

Red wire

4 Take the used thermistor out from the coupling, and then replace it with the new one.

Used thermistor

New thermistor

5 Attach the new banding band and the packing, and then reassemble all the removed
parts in reverse order of the procedures above.

[Cautions]
(1) When attaching new packing, peel off the paper liner first, and then apply the packing around the
bundle of wires and tubes.
(2) When reassembling the removed parts, be sure NOT to pinch any wires.
(3) When attaching the new banding band and the new packing, be sure to the points described in the
figure below.

[UX-D, B] Refer to these figures when attaching the banding band


and the packing(s) for their locations and directions.

Attach the packing(s) and the banding band


[UX-E]
referring to the mark on the tube, which is put in
procedure 2.

Make the knot of a binding band


an opposite angle.

5-18

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


5.12 Deflecting Base Replacement Procedure
When the LED protection glass is damaged or when the deflection base is extremely
dirty and cannot be rid of the abnormality even after cleaning, it is necessary to replace
the deflection base. Perform it by using the following procedure.

1 Depressurize the printer.

2 Remove the head cover and heater cover.

3 Unscrew the the deflecting electrode setscrew and the charged electrode feed screw
on the surface of the deflecting base.

4 Perform「5.7 APH board replacement(EZJ112A)」1~4.

5 Unscrew the high-voltage electrical power lines setscrews, the charged electrode feed screw
and high-voltage GND screw on the rear side of the head base.
The setscrews of the high-voltage electrical power lines are coated with silicon rubber.
Unscrew the screws by breaking the coating by a driver or the like.

6 Remove the deflecting base by unloosening the deflecting base setscrew and replace it
with a new one.

7 Perform the assembly in inverse procedure.


「Caution」・When mounting the rear cover and the deflection base, pay attention to
pinching of the lead and gasket.
・There are two kinds of length of the M2 screw. It may cause a failure
if mistakenly mounted.
・ Push the deflecting base against the arrow direction.

Air purge tube Charged electrode feed screw

M2X5

M2X3
Deflecting electrode(-)
Nozzle setscrew setscrew

トラ

High voltage GND screw


Heater

Recovery tube APH signal wire

High-voltage electrical power


Video wire

5-19

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


8 Coat the high-voltage electrical power lines setscrew part with silicon rubber according to

the following procedure.


①Fill the top and bottom of the ring terminal with silicon rubber, using a dispenser.
Caution
a) Hold the head as shown below in order to prevent the silicone from
High-voltage line terminal
running. High-voltage line terminal
。 (round terminal) (round terminal)

Dispenser Dispenser

Insert the tip of the dispenser If the downside is


into the downside of the almost filled, fill up the
terminal to fill the downside upside of the screw.
space.

10~20mm

Nozzle

b) Fill it up with the silicone sufficiently as shown below.

The metallic portion of the


Silicone Filling Portion high-voltage line terminal portion
(Hatching Portion) should be completely hidden.

Rib of the base plate

Fill it up to approximately the same D section


height as the rib of the base plate so that
the screw head will not be out.
Rib

High-voltage round terminal

Fill up the downside of the terminal as well.

5-20

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


②Heat the filled part by a warm air of a drier (500W equivalent) for 7 to 8 minutes
and cure the surface.
Caution : Keep the drier 50 to 100mm away so as not to deform the tube by
keeping it too close.
Drier

50 to 100mm

Nozzle
Knack of infusing the
When infusing the silicone into the dispenser, perform it as shown below (to
purge air).
シリコン注入のコツ
Cylinder Put the silicone in
Metallic needle

Place the needle on


the upside
Cylinder
Wait until the silicone comes
down to the piston

Downside is NG
Piston

Place the needle on


the upside
Push the piston as if to purge air

ディスペンサの保管

Storage of the dispenser

If left as-is after use, the silicone hardens in the metallic needle portion of the
dispenser. Plug it by using a clip and so on.

Clip

9 Push “Beam adjustment” on the “Circulation control screen” to adjust the position of the ink beam.

10 Perform ink drop.

11 Perform the auto phase gain adjustment.

5-21

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


5.13 Head base Replacement Procedure
When damaging the head base, the head base must be replaced. Perform it by the following procedure.

1 Remove the head cover and heater cover.

2 Remove the nozzle described in the item 5.7.

3 Remove the deflecting base described in the item 5.11.

4 Remove the sealing valve described in the item 5.4.

5 Remove the heating unit described in the item 5.5.

6 Remove the gutter base described in the item 5.3.

7 Remove the FG and NH sponges.

8 Remove the fixing screw of the APH sensor board.

9 Unscrew the fastening screw between the head base and the head cable, and remove the head base.

10 Attach a new head base.


「Caution」
(A) Do not mix up lead wires and tubes which each is disposed on the front face (nozzle side)
and the back face (high voltage cable side).

Front face: UXB,D ink-furnishing tube (E), makeup ink tube (R), circulation tube (J), air purge.
UX-E In addition to the above:Gas supply tube(5)、Liquid recovery tube (6)

UX-B/D UX-E
Air purge
Air purge

E:Supply Tube E:Supply Tube


J:Circulation tube J:Circulation tube 6
R:Cleaning tube R:Cleaning tube
5:Gas Supply Tube(Mist collector)
6:Liquid recovery tube(Mist collector)
Back face: recovery tube, APH boad power supply wire, FG wire, APH signal wire,
video signal wire, heater feeder wire, cover SW signal wire,
EZJ112A board signal wire, high voltage feeder wire

5-22

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


11 Attach the heater, the deflecting base, the heater spacer packing and the deflecting base packing.

「Caution」Push the deflecting base against the arrow direction

Heater Deflecting base

Heater

Heater spacer packing Deflecting base packing

12 Dispose the APH tube part group on the head base and connect it to the recovery tube.

13 Fasten the FG and the deflecting electrode GD together. Screw one of the deflecting electrode GD
on the front edge of the head base.

14 Screw the video signal wire and the high voltage wire. After screwing the high voltage wire,
coat it with silicon. With respect to the coating method, refer to the item 5.11 8.「Deflecting base
replacement Procedure」

15 Assemble each connector and close the base rear cover.

16 Attach the gutter base, the sealing valve and the nozzle.

17 Attach the cable seal plate, the deflecting electrode and the video signal wire.
“Caution” Be careful so as not to crush a tube

18 Connect the excitation connector and attach all of covers so as not to enwind wires.

5-23

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


5.14 Head Cable Replacement Procedure
1 Refer to 「4.13 Print head replacement procedure」for separatingto console and head cable.

Caution against an electric


There is work of opening the maintenance door. In order to avoid an electric shock, be
sure to turn off the power before access the high voltage power supply.

2 Remove the head cover and heater cover.

3 Perform 「5.12 Head base replacement procedure」1~5 and 7~9

4 Remove the screws(4 PCS.) as shown below.

5 Pull out the wires and tubes.

Edge guard

6 Attach the new head cable.

(1) As re-install the cables and tubes, pay attention totake of Edge guard and breakcables and tubes.。
(2) Refer to 「4.13 Print head replacement procedure」12 for connection of console and head cable.
(3) Refer to「5.12Head base replacement procedure 」1~5 and 7~9for connecting the Print head
and the Head cable .

5-24

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


6. Troubleshooting
6.1 Troubleshooting List
Subsection Name Remarks
6.2 Faults – Ink-stop type
6.2.1 Ink Low Fault
6.2.2 Main Ink Tank Too Full
6.2.3 Deflection Voltage Fault
6.2.4 Ink Replenishment Timeout
6.2.5 Ink Drop Charge Too Low
6.2.6 System operation error C/M/S
6.2.7 Deflection Voltage Leakage
6.2.8 Makeup Replenishment Timeout
6.2.9 Makeup Low Fault
6.2.10 Ink Heating Unit Too High
6.2.11 Multi DC Power Supply Fan Fault
6.2.12 Charge Voltage Fault
6.2.13 No Ink Drop Charge
6.2.14 Ink Heating Unit Temperature Sensor Fault
6.2.15 Memory Fault C/M/S
6.2.16 Memory Fault OP
6.2.17 Internal Communication Error S
6.2.18 Ink Heating Unit Over Current
6.2.19 Ambient Temperature Sensor Fault
6.2.20 Cooling Fan Fault
6.2.21 Pump Motor Fault
6.2.22 Viscometer Ink Temperature Sensor Fault
6.2.23 Ink Heating Unit Temperature Low
6.2.24 Model-key Fault
6.2.25 Language-key Fault
6.2.26 Charge Voltage Too Low
6.2.27 Circulation Route Pressure Is High
6.2.28 Makeup Level Sensor Broken 3
6.2.29 Ink Drop Charge Fault
‐ Ink Low Fault2 Refer to “6.4.19”.
‐ Makeup Low Fault2 Refer to “6.4.20”.

6.3 Faults – Print-stop type


6.3.1 Ink Drop Charge Too High
6.3.2 Barcode Short On Numbers
6.3.3 Shutdown Fault
6.3.4 Count Overflow
6.3.5 Print Overlap Fault
6.3.6 Print Head Cover Open
6.3.7 Improper Sensor Position
6.3.8 Target Sensor Fault
6.3.9 Target Spacing Too Close
6.3.10 Print Data Changeover In Progress S/M/V
6.3.11 Blank Print Items
6.3.12 Excessive Format Count
Refer to the Technical Manual
- Communication Buffer Fault “5.9. Communication Buffer”.
6.3.13 Internal Communication Error C/M
6.3.14 Invalid Data Change Timing
6.3.15 Invalid Count Data Change Timing
6.3.16 Invalid Print Start Timing
6.3.17 Ink Shelf Life Information
6.3.18 Makeup Shelf Life Information
6.3.19 Free layout printing failure
6.3.20 Print Data Changeover Error CM
6.3.21 Ink Level Sensor Broken 1、3
6.3.22 Makeup Level Sensor Broken 1、4

6-1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


6.4 Warning conditions (printing continuously performed)
6.4.1 Excitation V-ref. Review, Excitation V-ref. Review 2
6.4.2 Viscosity Reading Instability
6.4.3 Viscosity Readings Out of Range
6.4.4 High Ink Viscosity
6.4.5 Low Ink Viscosity
6.4.6 Battery Low M
6.4.7 Calendar Content Inaccurate
Refer to the Technical
- External Communication Error nnn manual “5.7. Warning
message”.
6.4.8 Excitation V-ref. Char. Height Review
- Ink Low Warning Refer to “6.2.1”.
- Makeup Low Warning Refer to “6.2.9”.
6.4.9 Ink Shelf Life Exceeded
6.4.10 Ambient Temperature Too High/Too Low
6.4.11 Ink Pressure High
6.4.12 Battery Low C
6.4.13 Ink pressure Low
6.4.14 Product Speed Matching Error
6.4.15 Cooling Fan Warning
- Model-key Fault Refer to “6.2.24”.
- Language-key Fault Refer to “6.2.25”.
6.4.16 Makeup Eject Pressure Low
6.4.17 Inside Temperature Too High
6.4.18 Parts Life Expired
6.4.19 Ink Level Sensor Broken 2
6.4.20 Makeup Level Sensor Broken 2
‐ Ink Low Warning2 Refer to “6.4.19”.
‐ Makeup Low Warning2 Refer to “6.4.20”.

6.5 Faults – No on-screen indications


6.5.1 Chipped print (lower dots)
6.5.2 Chipped print (upper dots)
6.5.3 Varying character height
6.5.4 Increased character distortion
6.5.5 Disordered characters
6.5.6 Ink leakage/blowout (Print head)
6.5.7 Printing initiation failure in ready-for-printing state (no prints)
6.5.8 No ink ejection from nozzle
6.5.9 Freeze of display
Problems due to inappropriate ink stream position in charged
6.5.10 electrode
6.5.11 Problems due to inappropriate ink stream position to gutter
6.5.12 Increase of dot missing
6.5.13 Handling of the ink drop charge related faults
6.5.14 Failure of adjustment of excitation voltage
6.5.15 System Error * *
6.5.16 Power does not turn ON after pressing Start button.
6.5.17 Power does not turn OFF after pressing Stop button.
6.5.18 No ink suction from gutter.
6.5.19 Power Restoration Procedure
Startup process after long-term shutdown and
6.5.20 How to restore the operation
6.5.21 Firmware download failure
6.5.22 Language download failure
6.5.23 Liquid dripping from Air Exhaust
6.5.24 Ink deposition on Printhead cover
6.5.25 Cartridge-ID read failure
6.5.26 Solenoid unlock failure

6-2

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


6.2 Faults – Ink-stop type
6.2.1 Ink Low Fault
Ink Low Fault

Open the maintenance cover.

Uncap the ink reservoir


No and add ink.
Is there ink in the ink reservoir?

Yes Is the fault cleared by


No
pressing the Clear key?
● Turn OFF the power.
● Unscrew and pull out the sensor Yes
section.
END

Is an insoluble substance Yes


deposited on the sensor?
Clean the electrode with JK wiper
No
moistened with makeup.
Return the sensor
section to its position.

Return the sensor


section to its position.

1
Is the fault cleared
No
by power-on reset?

Remove and joint the following Yes


connectors. 1
● EZJ126: CN13 3
● EZJ132: CN1, CN3

2
Is the fault cleared No
by power-on reset?

3 Yes

END
Is the connection NG
harness
conducting?

OK

Replace the EZJ126 board. Replace the harness.

6-3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


6.2.2 Main Ink Tank Too Full

Main Ink Tank Too Full

No
Is the initial-level sensor
Open the maintenance cover.
ON?

Yes Check the initial-


Is the ink main tank full Yes Has the Main Ink No level sensor
of ink? Tank Too Fill fault connection again and
frequently occurred?
correct it if necessary.
No
Yes
Turn OFF the power and then
Replace the MV7 (makeup
pull out the sensor .
valve) unit.

Drain the ink from the


ink main tank, and clear
the fault by pressing
Is there a creepage leak
the Clear key.
between the ground
electrode and the over fill
electrode of liquid level Yes
detection of the main tank?
(Check it by mounting and
removing the harness.) Remove the ink
adhering onto the
creepage surface Execute “Ink Drainage”
No between the two and “ink refill”
electrodes. Or replace procedure, and confirm
the sensor part of the that ink is refilled to
main ink tank. initial level of ink main
tank.

No Is the fault cleared Yes


by power-on reset?

Replace the EZJ126 board. END

6-4

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


6.2.3 Deflection Voltage Fault

Deflection Voltage
Fault

Is the EZJ125 board CN6


connector or high-voltage Yes
power supply output
connector disconnected?
No
Disconnect the connector and then
Connect the connector.
reconnect it.

Does the printer


Yes
become ready for END
printing?

No
Replace the high-voltage
power supply unit.

Does the printer


Yes
become ready for END
printing?
No

Replace the EZJ125 board.

Does the printer


Yes
become ready for END
printing?
No

Replace the EZJ126 board.

6-5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


6.2.4 Ink Replenishment Time-out

Ink Replenishment
Time-out

Press the Reset key to clear the


fault and execute “Ink refill”.
Then restart the printer.

Does the “Replenishment No


Time-out” fault recur?

Yes

Does the MV2 (Replenishment No


valve) operate on the solenoid
valve/pump test screen?
Yes Does the MV2 operate when
Replace the connection the connector of the other
harness operating solenoid valve is
Yes
connected to MV2?


No

Does the ink flow into the main Replace MV2 or clean any ink
Yes ink tank from the ink reservoir build up or other foreign matter
when Pump.MV2 and MV6 are on MV2
operated on the solenoid
valve/pump test screen?
Yes Does the “Replenishment
No Time-out” fault recur?

No

Does the ink flow into the main


ink tank from the ink reservoir
when the CV assembly on the
tip of the tube connection block
of the ink reservoir is removed
No
and Pump,MV2 and MV4 are
operated on the solenoid
valve/pump test screen?

Yes
Clean any ink build up or other
foreign matters on CV

Refer to 4.14 Troubleshooting Procedure


for the Circulation System, probable ①
cause:The Supply Pump malfunctions
and Then, repair or replace supply

6-6

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine



Does the initial-level Yes
sensor operate?

No

Is the EZJ126 board CN13 or


Yes
EZJ132 board CN1, 3 connector
disconnected?

Connect the connector.


No
Disconnect the connectors, then
reconnect them (3 connectors).

Yes
Does the initial-level
sensor operate?

No

Is the connection harness No


conducting?

Replace the harness.


Yes

Is the fault cleared by Yes


power-on reset?

No

Replace the EZJ126 board.


Resume the
operation.

[CAUTION]
If you remove a solenoid valve or other piping part without relieving the
pressure from the path, the ink may gush out. Before performing the above
steps, be sure to provide pressure relief.

6-7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


6.2.5 Ink Drop Charge Too Low

Ink Drop Charge


Too Low

1
Is the nozzle clogged
or the ink stream bent? Yes
Pour a cleaning solution over
No the orifice plate surface to
clean it, then allow it to
thoroughly dry.
If the problem is
Are the charge electrode not fixed:
Yes
and nozzle end connected Execute the “Nozzle
via ink? Backwash” function from the
Pour the makeup over the circulation control screen.
No charge electrode and nozzle If the problem is
area to clean them and allow not fixed:
them to thoroughly dry. Remove the orifice plate from
the nozzle, subject it to
Is the gutter section Yes ultrasonic cleaning, reinstall
soiled ? it, and adjust the stream.

No
▪ Press the Reset key to
Clean the gutter and its
clear the fault.
surrounding area with a
▪ Eject the ink to restart the
cleaning solution. *1
IJ printer.

Is the cumulative ink


Yes
use time longer than
the useful ink life? 1
Replace the ink.
No

No
Is the ink drop shape good?

Yes

Replace the EZJ125 board.


Change the excitation
If the problem is
not fixed: voltage setting to assure
proper ink drop shape.
Replace the EZJ126 board.
If the problem is
not fixed:

Replace the print head.

Gutter

*1
Remove any dirt on this surface: If this surface is dirty, and the gutter
hole and APH shield are connected via ink, the APH signal output may
be unstable. Take special care when using carbon ink.

APH Shield
6-8

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


6.2.6 System Operation error C / M / S
System Operation error C / M / S

Is the IJ printer
No
connected to its
dedicated ground?
Properly establish the
Yes ground connection.

Are the nozzle head


and IJ printer main No
body insulated from
the other equipment?
Ensure that the print head
and printer main body are
Yes
not in contact with the
other equipment.

▪ Clear the fault.


▪ Restart the IJ printer.

No
Does the fault
recur?

Yes

Do not External communication Used the SOP05 for


Yes
sending during system
call up print data?
initialization
No

Yes External communication has


done during system initialization
Yes
No The strobe input timing is
following the regulation?
Do the system reset by rescue soft
No

Input the strobe signal with


Yes
Does the fault correct timing of the SOP05
recur? instruction.

No

Noise Fault M/S Noise Fault C

Replace the EZJ126 board. Replace the EZJ128 board.

No Does the fault


recur?

Yes
END
Replace the multiple
power supply.

6-9

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


6.2.7 Deflection Voltage Leakage

Deflection Voltage Leakage

Yes Does the ink stream


enter the center of the
Is the ink or makeup
Yes gutter?
deposited on the deflection
electrodes and their No
surrounding sections?
Adjust the ink stream position.
No
Is any foreign matter
Yes
deposited between the Thoroughly remove
deflection electrodes? ink/makeup deposits and
Remove
allow the affected area to
No foreign matter.
dry.

Are there any tapering


spikes of ink generated Yes ▪ Press the Clear key to clear
between the deflection the fault.
electrodes? ▪ Press the Start up key to
restart the IJ printer.

No Execute the “Nozzle


Backwash” function from
the circulation control
screen. Check the Yes
Is the alarm issued?
excitation voltage and
pressure.
No

Resume the
Yes
Is the alarm issued? operation.

No
Blow air over the
Resume the
deflection electrode area
operation.
because the ink and
makeup may remain.

Yes Is the ink recovered


No
▪ Press the Clear key to clear without filling the gutter
the fault. hole with the ink?
▪ Press the Start up key to
restart the IJ printer. Yes
See section “6.5.8, No ink suction
from gutter”.
Is the alarm issued?

No Yes
Is the alarm issued?
Resume the
operation.
No

1 Resume the
operation.

6-10

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1

Does the IJ printer become


ready when you start it by
pressing the Startup key
No
with the high-voltage power
supply unit output connector
disconnected? Replace the high-voltage
power supply unit.
Yes

No
Resume the
Is the alarm issued?
operation.

Yes

Replace the EZJ125 board.

No Resume the
Is the alarm issued?
operation.

Yes

Replace the EZJ126 board.

Wipe and clean the dust


Is the high-voltage line dusty? Yes
off the line and allow to
thoroughly dry.
No

Has the ink/makeup entered Wipe the entered ink/makeup


inside the nozzle head rear Yes away with JK wiper and allow
cover? inside print head rear cover to
thoroughly dry.
No

Replace the ink.

6-11

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


6.2.8 Makeup Replenishment Time-out

Makeup Replenishment
Time-out

Does the MV7 (Makeup valve)


No
operate on the solenoid
valve/pump test screen?
Yes Does the MV7 operate when
Replace the connection
the connector of the other
harness
① operating solenoid valve is
Yes
connected to MV7?
The makeup does not flow into
the main ink tank from the
No
makeup reservoir when Pump No
and MV7 are operated on the
Replace MV7 or clean any ink
solenoid valve/Pump test screen
build up or other foreign
Yes matters on MV7.
Refer to 4.14 Trouble shooting
Procedure for the Circulation System,
Probable cause : The makeup pump ①
malfunctions, and Then, repair or replace
Makeup Pump.

Does the initial-level Yes


sensor operate?

No

Is CN13 of the EZJ126 board,


Yes
CN1 or CN3 of or EZJ132 board
disconnected?

Connect the connector.


No
Disconnect the connectors, then
reconnect them (3 connectors).

Yes
Does the Initial-level
sensor operate?

No

Is the connection harness No


conducting?

Replace the harness.


Yes

Is the fault cleared by Yes


power-on reset?

No

Replace the EZJ126 board. Resume the


operation.
[CAUTION]
If you remove the solenoid valve or other piping part without relieving the
pressure from the path, the ink may gush out. Before performing the above
steps, be sure to provide pressure relief.

6-12

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


6.2.9 Makeup Low Fault

Makeup Low Fault

Open the maintenance cover.

Is the makeup
No
reservoir charged
with the makeup?
Uncap the makeup
Yes reservoir and add the
makeup.

Turn OFF the power.


Can the abnormality
No
be cleared by pressing
the Clear key?
Is the sensor connector
Yes
disconnected? Yes
(See the overall wiring END
diagram.)

No

Connect the sensor


connector.

Is the EZJ126 board CN13 or END


Yes
EZJ132 board CN1, 3 connector
disconnected?

Connect the connector.


No
Disconnect the connectors, then
reconnect them (3 connectors).

Is the fault cleared by No


power-on reset?

Yes Is the connection harness NG


conducting?

OK

Replace the sensor. Replace the connection harness.

Is the fault cleared by


Yes
power-on reset?

No

END
Replace the EZJ126 board.

6-13

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


6.2.10 Ink Heating Unit Too High

Ink Heating Unit Too High

▪ Clear the fault.


▪ From the maintenance screen, place
the heating unit in the operating mode. *) *) Refer to the following caution.
▪ Restart the IJ printer.

No See Section “6.5.8, No ink ejection


Does the ink jet out?
from nozzle.”
Yes

Disconnect EZJ125 board


CN7 connector and
reconnect it.

▪ Clear the fault.


▪ From the maintenance screen, place
the heating unit in the operating mode. *) *) Refer to the following caution.
▪ Restart the IJ printer.

Does the fault recur? No

Yes

Replace the heating unit.

▪ Clear the fault.


▪ From the maintenance screen, place
the heating unit in the operating mode. *) *) Refer to the following caution.
▪ Restart the IJ printer.

Does the fault recur? No

Yes

Replace the EZJ125 board.

・Clear the fault.


・From the maintenance screen, place
the heating unit in the operating mode. *) *) Refer to the following caution.
・Restart the IJ printer.

Does the fault recur? No

Yes
Resume the
Replace the EZJ126 board. operation.

! Caution
- On detecting this fault, the IJ printer automatically sets the “Ink temperature
correction” to (disable).
“System environment setup: Ink temperature correction (enable)  (disable)”
After getting rid of the fault, reset the Ink temperature correction to (enable).
“System environment setup: Ink temperature correction (disable)  (enable)”
- In the condition of the “Ink temperature correction (disable), ” the “Ink Temperature
Correction Notice” message appears each time the power is turned on.
(See “1.6 Heating of Ink” in the Instruction manual. )

6-14

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


6.2.11 Multi DC Power Supply Fan Fault

Multi DC Power
Supply Fan Fault

No Is the EZJ126 CN2 connector or Yes


Is the multiple power supply fan
multiple power supply CN4
running?
connector disconnected?
Yes
No
Connect the connector.

Replace the EZJ126 board.

Yes
Is the problem fixed? END

No

Replace the multiple power supply

6-15

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


6.2.12 Charge Voltage Fault

Charge Voltage Fault

Remove the print head cover.

Pour the makeup over the


charge electrode area to clean it.

・Allow the print head surface


to adequately dry.
・Clear the fault.
・Restart the IJ printer.

Yes
Does the printer become
ready?

No

Replace the EZJ125 board.

Does the printer become Yes


ready?

No

Replace the EZJ126 board.

Does the printer become Yes


ready?

No

Replace the multiple power supply.

Does the printer become Yes


ready?
No

Replace the print head. END

6-16

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


6.2.13 No Ink Drop Charge
No Ink Drop
Charge

Is the ink stream Refer to “6.5.8 No ink


No
being ejected from ejection from nozzle.”
the nozzle?

Yes

Is the nozzle clogged or Yes Refer to “6.2.5 Ink Drop


Charge Too Low”.
the ink stream bent?

No

Is the gutter section Yes Refer to “6.2.5 Ink Drop


Charge Too Low”.
soiled?

No

Is the ink recovered without No Refer to “6.5.18 No ink


suction from gutter”.
filling the gutter hole with it?

Yes

Is the EZJ125 CN2, CN3, CN4, CN5, CN6 or


Yes
CN7 connector, or high-voltage power supply Connect the connector.
CN1 or CN2 connector disconnected?

No

Replace the high-


voltage power supply.

Is the problem Yes


END
fixed?

No

Replace the EZJ125 board.

Is the problem Yes


fixed? END

No

Replace the EZJ126 board.

Is the problem Yes


fixed? END

No

Replace the EZJ112 board.

Is the problem Yes


END
fixed?

No

Replace the print head.


6-17

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


6.2.14 Ink Heating Unit Temperature Sensor Fault

Ink Heating Unit


Temperature Sensor
Fault

Disconnect the EZJ125 board


CN7 connector and reconnect it.

▪ Clear the fault.


▪ From the maintenance screen, place
the heating unit in the operating mode. *) *) Refer to the following caution.
▪ Restart the IJ printer.

No
Does the fault recur?

Yes

Replace the heating unit.

▪ Clear the fault.


▪ From the maintenance screen, place
the heating unit in the operating mode. *) *) Refer to the
▪ Restart the IJ printer. following caution.

No
Does the fault recur?

Yes

Replace the EZJ125 board.

▪ Clear the fault.


▪ From the maintenance screen, place
the heating unit in the operating mode. *) *) Refer to the
▪ Restart the IJ printer. following caution.

No
Does the fault recur?

Yes

Replace the EZJ126 board. Resume the


operation.

! Caution
- On detecting this fault, the IJ printer automatically sets the “Ink temperature
correction” to (disable).
“System environment setup: Ink temperature correction (enable)  (disable)”
After getting rid of the fault, reset the Ink temperature correction to (enable).
“System environment setup: Ink temperature correction (disable)  (enable)”
- In the condition of the “Ink temperature correction (disable), ” the “Ink Temperature
Correction Notice” message appears each time the power is turned on.
(See “1.6 Heating of Ink” in the Instruction manual”.)

6-18

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


6.2.15 Memory Fault C/M/S

Memory Memory
Fault M/S Fault C

Does the fault recur Yes Does the fault recur Yes
upon power-on reset? upon power-on reset?
No No

Do the system reset by rescue soft Do the system reset by rescue soft

Yes Yes
Does the fault recur? Does the fault recur?

No No

Replace the EZJ126 board. Replace the EZJ128 board.

Resume the
operation.

6.2.16 Memory Fault OP

Memory
Fault OP

Does the fault recur


Yes
when the EZJ130 board
is attached?

No
Replace the EZJ130 board.

Resume the
operation.

6.2.17 Internal Communication Error S

Internal Communication
Error S

Does the fault recur


Yes
upon power-on reset?

No
Replace the EZJ126 board.

Resume the
operation.

6-19

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


6.2.18 Ink Heating Unit Over Current
Ink Heating Unit
Over Current

Is the PTC resistance


measured (between the No
EZJ125 board TP3 and TP15)
lower than 23 Ω?

Yes

Replace the heating unit.

▪ Clear the fault.


▪ From the maintenance screen, place *) Refer to the
the heating unit in the operating mode. *) following caution.
▪ Restart the IJ printer.

No
Does the fault recur?

Yes

Replace the EZJ125 board.

▪ Clear the fault.


▪ From the maintenance screen, place
the heating unit in the operating mode. *) *) Refer to the
▪ Restart the IJ printer. following caution.

No
Does the fault recur?

Yes

Replace the EZJ126 board.

▪ Clear the fault.


▪ From the maintenance screen, place
the heating unit in the operating mode. *) *) Refer to the
▪ Restart the IJ printer. following caution.

No
Does the fault recur?

Yes
Resume the
Replace the print head. operation.

! Caution
- On detecting this fault, the IJ printer automatically sets the “Ink temperature
correction” to (disable).
“System environment setup: Ink temperature correction (enable)  (disable)”
After getting rid of the fault, reset the Ink temperature correction to (enable).
“System environment setup: Ink temperature correction (disable)  (enable)”
- In the condition of the “Ink temperature correction (disable), ” the “Ink Temperature
Correction Notice” message appears each time the power is turned on.
(See “1.6 Heating of Ink” in the Instruction manual”.)

6-20

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


6.2.19 Ambient Temperature Sensor Fault

Ambient Temperature
Sensor Fault

Disconnect the EZJ125 board


CN7 connector and reconnect it.

No
Does the fault recur?

Yes

Replace the print head.

Does the fault recur? No

Yes

Replace the EZJ126 board. Resume the


operation.

6.2.20 Cooling Fan Fault

Cooling Fan Fault

Disconnect the EZJ126 board


CN21 connector and reconnect it.

No
Does the fault recur?

Yes

Replace cooling fan.

Does the fault recur? No

Yes

Replace the EZJ126 board. Resume the


operation.

6-21

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


6.2.21 Pump Motor Fault

Pump Motor Fault

Pull out and insert the connector


・CN13 of the EZJ126 board
・CN1 and CN3 of the EZJ126 board
・pump motor
t

Does the fault recur? No

Yes

Replace the pump motor.

Does the fault recur? No

Yes

Yes Does the connection


harness have electrical
continuity?

No

Replace the connection harness

No
Does the fault recur?

Yes

Resume the
Replace the EZJ126 board.
operation.

6-22

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


6.2.22 Viscometer Ink Temperature Sensor Fault

Viscometer Ink
Temperature Sensor
Fault

Disconnect and reconnect the following


connectors.
▪ EZJ126: CN13
▪ EZJ132: CN1, 3
▪ Thermistor relay harness connector

No
Does the fault recur?

Yes

Replace the thermistor of Viscometer.

No
Does the fault recur?

Yes

Replace the EZJ126 board. Resume the


operation.

6.2.23 Ink Heating Unit Temperature Low

Ink Heating Unit Temperature Low

Disconnect the EZJ125


board CN7 connector and
reconnect it.

Is the fault issued No


again?
Yes

Replace the heating unit.

Is the fault issued No


again?
Yes

Replace the EZJ125 board.

Is the fault issued No


again?
Yes

Resume the
Replace the EZJ126 board.
operation.

6-23

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


6.2.24 Model-key Fault

Model key fault

Does the fault recur after Yes


disconnect and reconnect the model
key to EZJ126 board CN15?

No

Do the system reset by rescue soft

Yes
Does the fault recur?

No

Replace the EZJ126 board.

Yes
Does the fault recur?

No

Resume the
It is necessary to change the model key.
operation.
Contact your local Hitachi sales office with
the unit serial number and model name.

6.2.25 Language-key Fault

Language-key Fault

Does the fault recur after disconnect Yes


and reconnect the language key to
EZJ126 board CN25?

No

Do the system reset by rescue soft

Yes
Does the fault recur?

No

Replace the EZJ126 board.

Yes
Does the fault recur?

No
Resume the
It is necessary to change the language key. operation.
Contact your local Hitachi sales office with
the unit serial number and model name.

6-24

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


6.2.26 Charge Voltage Too Low

Charge Voltage Too Low

Clear the fault.


Place the printer in The “Ready” state.

No
Does the fault recur?

Yes

Replace the EZJ125 board.

No
Does the fault recur?

Yes

Replace the high-voltage power supply.

No
Does the fault recur?

Yes

Replace the EZJ126 board.

Resume the
operation.

6-25

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


6.2.27 Circulation Route Pressure Is High

<Conditions an alarm is issued>


An alarm “Circulation Route Pressure Is High” is displayed on the screen when the
ink is being ejected and the ink pressure is not lowered at MV5 “ON/Open” step in the
following sequences 1), 2) and 3).
(When Ink pressure is still kept at 0.05Mpa or higher.)
1) Eject Ink (Goes to Ready)
2) Eject Ink (Goes to Standby)
3) Ink circulation
Refer to “7.3 Circulation sequence” for sequences.

Circulation Route
Pressure Is High

No
Does the MV5 operate?

Replace MV5 or clean any ink buildup or


other foreign matters.
Yes

Yes
Does the fault recur?

No

Press “Nozzle backwash” button and then


“Start/Continue” button on Circulation Control
screen and sprinkle makeup over the tip of the
nozzle.

Yes
Is makeup suctioned?

No

Press “Operation test” button of “Viscometer calibration”


screen and confirm by the naked eye that ink flows to
the viscometer from the Main ink tank.

Does ink flow to the Yes


viscometer from the Main
ink tank?

No
Yes
Does the fault recur?

No

Resume the
Replace the circulation pump. operation. Replace the print head.

6-26

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


6.2.28 Makeup Level Sensor Broken (3)

Makeup Level Sensor


Broken (3).

Go to “Level sensor confirmation”


screen and check if all sensors
contained in Makeup reservoir work
properly.

Turn OFF
power.

Any disconnection or
poor connection is found Yes
at CN13 connector on Remove the connector once and
EZJ126 board or CN1 or reconnect it
CN3 connector on
EZJ132 board?

No

Does the connection


No
harness have Replace the connection harness
electrical continuity?

Yes

Replace the sensor block Yes


of Makeup reservoir.

No

Restart IJP and go to “Level


sensor confirmation” screen
No
and check if all sensors
contained in Makeup reservoir
work properly.

Yes
Replace EZJ126 board.
End

[CAUTION]
1. If Makeup Level Sensor Broken (3) is issued, the machine stops ejecting ink and becomes Fault
status.

6-27

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


6.2.29 Ink Drop Charge Fault

Ink Drop Charge Fault

Is the setting of DSW2 of No Correct the setting of DSW2 of


EZJ125 board correct? EZJ125 board.

Yes
Yes
Does the fault recur?

No

Replace the EZJ125 board.

No
Does the fault recur?

Yes

Replace the high voltage power supply.

No
Does the fault recur?

Yes

Replace theEZJ126 board.

Resume the operation

6-28

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


6.3 Faults – Print-stop type
6.3.1 Ink Drop Charge Too High
Ink Drop Charge
Too High
Clean the gutter section and its surrounding
area with a cleaning solution. (When using
carbon type ink, remove the deflection plate,
Is the gutter Yes charge plate and gutter, then clean the
mounting base surface as mentioned on
section soiled?
“Handling guidance of each ink; item 6, Print
head cleaning”.
No

Does the IJ printer


become ready for
printing when you Yes
initiate ink ejection
and start it?
Resume the
No operation.
Is the ink drop No
shape good?

Yes
Change the excitation
voltage setting to assure
Is the ink proper ink drop shape.
recovered without No Refer to “6.5.18 No ink
filling the gutter suction from gutter”.
hole with it?
Yes

Is any vibration or shock applied


to the IJ printer, print head, or Yes
print head cable during operation
or startup?
Eliminate the cause of
No
Does the IJ printer become ready vibration or shock.
for printing when you eject ink
and start the IJ printer with the Yes
high voltage power supply unit
high voltage output FASTON
terminal disconnected? Replace the high-voltage
power supply unit.
No
Has the ink/makeup entered inside
the print head rear cover? Yes
(See the section on print head
operation and replacement.)

No Wipe the entered


ink/makeup away with
Replace the EZJ125 board. JK wiper and allow the
print head rear surface to
If the problem is
thoroughly dry.
not fixed:
Replace the EZJ126 board.
If the problem is
not fixed:

Replace the EZJ112 board.

If the problem is
not fixed:
Replace the print head.
6-29

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


6.3.2 Barcode Short On Numbers

Barcode Short On Numbers

Input the fixed number of character for EAN-13,


EAN-8, UPC-A, UPC-E

Resume the operation.

Fixed character number


When country code is input When country code is input
on edit message screen on print format screen
EAN-13 12 10
EAN-8 7 5
UPC-A 11
UPC-E 8
GS-1 Limited:13
data bar Omnidirectional:13

Refer to the Instruction Manual, ”4.13.3 Set various printing”.

6.3.3 Shutdown Fault

Shutdown Fault

Disconnect the EZJ113


board CN4 connector and
EZJ126 CN20 connector
and reconnect them.

Is the fault issued No


again?
Yes

Replace the EZJ113 board.

Is the fault issued No


again?
Yes

Resume the
Replace the EZJ126 board.
operation.

6-30

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


6.3.4 Count Overflow

Count Overflow

In case of count multiplication printing, set the count condition


so that the digit number of integer part of multiplication result (*)
is not exceeded the input count character.

*) Multiplication result = “Count value” x “Count multiplier”

Resume the operation.

6.3.5 Print Overlap Fault

Print Overlap Fault

Is the next printing


sequence timed before Yes
completion of the current
one?
No

Is the time interval between


the end of a printing operation Yes
and the beginning of the next
printing operation less than
9 ms? Set the time interval between the
No end of a printing operation and
the beginning of the next
printing operation to 9 ms or longer.
Are the repeat printing
intervals less than the Yes
printing time plus 9 ms with
the repeat printing mode
selected? Set the repeat printing intervals to
the printing time plus 9 ms or
No longer.

Is the print start signal Yes


chattering?

No Perform sensor filter setup.

Replace the EZJ126 board.

Perform a reset to clear the


fault.

Resume the
operation.

6-31

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


6.3.6 Print Head Cover Open

Print Head Cover Open

Is the print head cover Yes


removed?
No Properly install the
print head cover.

Is the print head cover No


completely closed?
Yes
Completely close the
print head cover.

Is the magnet inside


Yes
the head cover
damaged or missing?
No Properly install the
magnet.

Open the print head rear cover


and position the magnet close to
the cover switch.
Press the Clear key to

clear the fault.

Does the cover switch No


conduct? Resume the
Yes operation.
Replace the cover

switch.

Is the EZJ125 board CN7 Yes


connector disconnected?

No

Replace the EZJ126 board. Connect the connector.

6-32

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


6.3.7 Improper Sensor Position

Improper Sensor Position

No Is the repeat printing Yes

function required?

Is there an excessive
clearance between the Yes
print head and print target
Is the “Repeat count” detector?
is set to “0000” from
Yes No
the print
specifications screen? Decrease the
clearance between
the print head and
No
print target
detector.
Set the “Repeat count”
to “0000”.
No Is the print start signal

chattering?
Resume the
Yes
operation.

Replace the EZJ126 board. Ensure that the print


start signal does not
chatter any longer.

6-33

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


6.3.8 Target Sensor Fault

Target Sensor Fault

Is the target sensor fault No


function required?
From the printing
Yes specifications screen, select a
“Target sensor timer” setting
of “0000”.

Is the “Sensor out timer”


No
setting is greater than
necessary for the sensor
normal ON time?
Select a setting that is
Yes
greater than necessary.

Does the sensor turn No


ON and OFF?

Yes Is there any dirt


Yes
buildup or other
obstacle on the sensor?
No

Replace the EZJ127 board.


Clean the sensor to Replace the sensor.
If the problem is eliminate any obstacle.
not fixed

Replace the EZJ126 board.

Clear the fault.

Resume the
operation.

6-34

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


6.3.9 Target Spacing Too Close

Target Spacing
Too Close

Are there more than four


workpieces (print targets)
Yes
between the sensor and
print head?
Decrease the clearance
between the sensor and
No print head and reduce the
number of workpieces
between the sensor and
print head to four or less.

Yes
Is the sensor chattering?

No Ensure that the sensor does


not chatter.

Replace the EZJ126 board.

6.3.10 Print Data Changeover In Progress S/M/V

Print Data Changeover


In Progress

Resume the
operation.

SUPPLEMENT
The print target detection signal entered while the printer was not
ready. See that the print target detection signal enters after a while.

There is a way to set the item “Print data changeover” on User


environment setup menu to “Disable”.
Refer to the Instruction Manual, ”6.1 Set the user environment;
⑤ Print Data Changeover In Progress error”.

6-35

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


6.3.11 Blank Print Items

Blank Print Items

Does any print item


consisting of Blank Yes
characters alone
exist?
Adjust the print contents so
No
that print items consisting of
Blank characters only no
longer exist.

Resume the
operation.

6.3.12 Excessive Format Count

Excessive Format Count

Are there more than


nine columns having Yes

differing formats?

Make print format


No adjustments so that the
number of columns having
differing formats is reduced to
eight or less.

Resume the
operation.

SUPPLEMENT

Columns differing in the line count, line spacing, or dot


matrix will be handled as different formats.

6-36

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


6.3.13 Internal Communication Error C / M

Internal Communication
Error C/M

Is the EZJ126 board


CN1 connector
Yes
disconnected or in
poor contact?

No

Is the EZJ128 board CN1 Yes


connector disconnected or in
poor contact?

No

Used the SOP05 for No

call up print data? Normality is restored when the


connector is disconnected and
Yes
then reconnected.

The strobe input timing is Yes


following the regulation?
Yes
No Does the fault recur?

Input the strobe signal with correct No

timing of the SOP05 instruction.

Yes
Does the fault recur?

No
Do the system reset by rescue soft

Yes
Does the fault recur?

No

Replace the EZJ128 board.

Yes
Does the fault recur?

No

Replace the EZJ126 board.

Resume the
operation.

6-37

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


6.3.14 Invalid Data Change Timing
6.3.15 Invalid Count Data Change Timing
6.3.16 Invalid Print Start Timing

Invalid ******** Timing

Resume the
operation.

SUPPLEME
The print target detection signal entered while the printer was not
ready. See that the print target detection signal enters after a while.

6.3.17 Ink Shelf Life Information

Ink Shelf Life


Information

Use ink within its expiration date at replacement,

and input the ink lot number on unit information screen.

Resume the
operation.

6.3.18 Makeup Shelf Life Information

Makeup Shelf Life


Information

Use makeup within its expiration date at replacement,

and input the makeup lot number on unit information screen.

Resume the
operation.

6-38

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


6.3.19 Free layout printing failure

Free layout printing failure

Delete the specific print items or Decrease the Ink drop use
rate. ( ex. 1/2→1/3)

No
Does the fault recur?

Yes

Resume the
operation.

Note
More detail, refer to the manual 4.8 Set the print format [Free layout; UX-D,E only].

6-39

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


6.3.20 Print data changeover error C/M

Print data changeover error C/M

No Edit the message again No


STOP mode? Does the fault recur?
when the printer is Stop.
YES Yes

Edit the message again,

after system initialization..

No Copy the data from USB


Does the fault recur?
to IJP
Yes

Is the EZJ126 board CN1 connector Yes


Connect the connector.
disconnected?

No

Yes
Is the EZJ126 board CN1 connector Connect the connector.
disconnected?

No

No
Does the fault recur?

Yes

Replace the EZJ126 board

No
Does the fault recur?

Yes

Replace the EZJ128 board

Resume the
operation

6-40

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


6.3.21 Ink Level Sensor Broken (1)(3)

Ink Level Sensor


Broken (1)(3)

Go to “Level sensor confirmation”


screen and check if all sensors
contained in Makeup reservoir work
properly.

Turn OFF
power.

Any disconnection or
poor connection is found Yes
at CN13 connector on Remove the connector once and
EZJ126 board or CN1 or reconnect it
CN3 connector on
EZJ132 board?

No

Does the connection No


harness have Replace the connection harness
electrical continuity?

Yes

Is ink deposition observed


between ground electrode
Yes
and sensor 1,2 or 3
electrode in Ink reservoir?
(check it by removing
harness and reconnecting)

Remove the ink deposition


No
on the electrodes and/or
in-between surface, OR
replace the sensor block of
Ink reservoir.

Restart IJP and go to


“Level sensor
confirmation” screen
and check if all sensors
No
contained in Ink
reservoir work properly.

Yes

Replace EZJ126 board. End

6-41

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


6.3.22 Makeup Level Sensor Broken (1)(4)
Makeup Level Sensor
Broken (1)(4)

Was the makeup


cartridge bottle When the message “Makeup
installed, whose Yes Low”warning shows up, install
net contents were the makeup cartridge bottle
substantially low? which is more than half full.

No
Go to “Level sensor confirmation” screen
and check if all sensors contained in
Makeup reservoir work properly.

Turn OFF
power.
Yes

Any disconnection or
poor connection is found
at CN13 connector on Remove the connector once and
EZJ126 board or CN1 or reconnect it
CN3 connector on
EZJ132 board?

No

Does the connection


No
harness have Replace the connection harness
electrical continuity?

Yes

Replace the Sensor block


of Makeup reservoir.

Restart IJP and go to


“Level sensor
No confirmation” screen
and check if all sensors
contained in Makeup
reservoir work properly.

Yes

Replace EZJ126 board. End

When this alarm appears, the makeup cannot be replaced till the message “Makeup Low” warning
is displayed on the screen.

6-42

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


6.4 Warning conditions (printing continuously performed)
6.4.1 Excitation V-ref. Review, Excitation V-ref. Review 2

Excitation V-ref. Review

Readjust the excitation setup.

Resume the operation.

6.4.2 Viscosity Reading Instability

Viscosity Reading
Instability
Viscosity Reading
during installation
Instability
(calibration)

Perform the viscometer Re-execute viscometer


operation test on the calibration (2-3 times).
Circulation system control
screen.

Does calibration finish No


normally?

Yes
Is it normally measured? No

Press [OK], then the


coefficient is determined
Yes

Replace the viscometer filter.

Yes
Is it normally measured?

No

Disassemble and clean the


viscometer.

Yes
Is it normally measured?

No
Perform viscometer
calibration

Replace the viscometer

Resume the
operation.

6-43

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


6.4.3 Viscosity Readings Out of Range

Viscosity Reading
Out of Range

Perform the viscometer


operation test on the
Circulation system control
screen.

Is it normally No

measured?

Yes

Replace the ink.

Yes
Is it normally measured?

No

Disconnect and reconnect the


following connectors.
▪ EZJ126: CN13, CN22
▪ EZJ132: CN1 to 4
▪ Proximity sensor, MV10

Yes
Is it normally measured?

No

Disassemble and clean the


viscometer.

Yes
Is it normally measured?

Perform the viscometer No


calibration

Replace the viscometer

Resume the
operation.

6-44

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


6.4.4 High Ink Viscosity

High Ink Viscosity

Check the printing quality.

Is the printing quality No


normal?

Yes Replace the ink.

Operate the printer for an hour


or so, and check the ink
viscosity.

Yes
Has the viscosity increased?

No
Replace the ink in the ink reservoir.

Resume the
operation.

6.4.5 Low Ink Viscosity

Low Ink Viscosity

Check the printing quality.

Is the printing quality No


normal?

Yes Replace the ink.

Operate the printer for an hour


or so, and check the ink
viscosity.

Yes
Has the viscosity decreased?

No
Replace the ink in the ink reservoir.

Resume the
operation.

6-45

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


6.4.6 Battery Low M

Battery Low M

Is the EZJ126 board


Yes
CN14 connector
disconnected or in poor
contact?

No
Normality is restored when
the connector is disconnected
Replace the battery in the
engine section. and then reconnected.

Yes
Does the fault recur?

No

Replace the EZJ126 board.

Resume the
operation.

6.4.7 Calendar Content Inaccurate

Calendar Content
Inaccurate

Is the EZJ128 board CN8


Yes
connector or EZJ126 board
CN14 connector disconnected
or in poor contact?

No
Normality is restored when
the connector is disconnected
Replace the batteries in the
controller/engine section. and then reconnected.

Does the fault recur? Yes

No

Replace the EZJ128 board.

Does the fault recur? Yes

No

Replace the EZJ126 board.

Resume the
operation.

6-46

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


6.4.8 Excitation V-ref. Char. Height Review

Excitation V-ref. Char. Height


Review

Readjust the excitation setup.

Resume the operation.

6.4.9 Ink Shelf Life Exceeded

Ink Shelf Life Exceeded

Has the “Ink alarm time”


Yes preselected from the
operation management
screen elapsed since last
ink replacement?

No

Was the “Ink operating


time” set to 0 from the
operation management No
screen when the ink was
replaced last?
Enter the cumulative ink ejection
Yes
time elapsed since last ink
replacement in the “Ink operating
time” field of the operation
management screen.

Enter the standard ink life


limit value in the “Ink alarm
time” field of the operation
management screen.

Is the “Ink operating time”


setting in the operation
management screen smaller Yes
than the ”Ink alarm time”
setting?

No

Replace the ink and set the


“Ink operating time” to 0
from the operation
management screen.

Resume the
operation.

6-47

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


6.4.10 Ambient Temperature Too High / Too Low

Ambient temperature
Too High / Too Low

Is the Ambient temperature Yes Properly set the Ambient


upper-/lower-limit value temperature upper-/lower-limit
erroneously set? value.

No
Does the IJ printer Use an air-conditioner or the like
temperature indication agree Yes to ensure that the IJ printer
with the ambient ambient temperature is within
temperature? the operating temperature range.
No

Is the EZJ125 board CN7 Yes


Connect the connector.
connector disconnected?

No

Replace the EZJ125 board.

Is the problem Yes


fixed?

No

Replace the EZJ126 board.

Is the problem Yes


fixed?

No

Replace the Thermistor of head cable.

Is the problem Yes


fixed?

No

Replace the print head.


END

6-48

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


6.4.11 Ink Pressure High

Ink Pressure High

Check the indicated value and


standard value of the ink
pressure on the Operation
management screen.

Is it above the upper limit?


Yes
(Indicated value >
standard value x 1.10)

No Can the pressure be


Yes adjusted by the pressure
reducing valve?

No

Replace the pressure reducing


valve.

Yes Can the pressure be


adjusted by the pressure
reducing valve?

No

Adjust the pressure to


standard value by the
pressure reducing valve

No
Is the warning released?

Yes

Replace the pressure sensor.


Resume the
operation.

6-49

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


6.4.12 Battery Low C

Battery Low C

Is the EZJ128 board


Yes
CN8 connector
disconnected or in poor
contact?

No
Normality is restored when
the connector is disconnected
Replace the battery in the
controller section. and then reconnected.

Does the fault recur? Yes

No

Replace the EZJ128 board.

Resume the
operation.

6-50

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


6.4.13 Ink Pressure Low

Ink Pressure Low

Yes
Does MV1, 2, 4, 9 operate?
No

Replace or repair the troubled


solenoid.

Does ink flow into main ink tank Yes


when operating pump, MV1 &
MV6?
No
Yes Does ink flow into main tank when
operating pump, MV2 & MV6?
Replace or repair the
supply pump No

Replace or repair the CV assembly.

Can the pressure be adjusted by No


the pressure reducing valve?

Yes Replace the three-way valve filter.

Yes Can the pressure be adjusted by


the pressure reducing valve?

No

Replace the viscometer filter.

Yes Can the pressure be adjusted by


the pressure reducing valve?

No

Replace the pressure reducing valve.

Yes Can the pressure be adjusted by


the pressure reducing valve?

No
Adjust the pressure to standard value
by the pressure reducing valve.

No
Is the warning released?

Yes
Resume the operation. Replace the pressure sensor.

6-51

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


6.4.14 Product Speed Matching Error

Product Speed
Matching Error

The frequency of the encoder signal is exceeding the


printing capability of the IJ printer.
Lower the frequency of the encoder signal, or increase its
dividing ratio. Note that the printed character width will
change if the Pulse rate div. Factor is changed.
See Technical Manual 4.3.3-3, ”Method of calculating the
conditions which allow product speed matching”.

Resume the
operation.

6.4.15 Cooling fan warning

Cooling Fan Warning

Disconnect the EZJ126 board CN13


connector, EZJ132 board CN1 and
CN3 connector, intake fan harness
and reconnect it.

No
Does the fault recur?

Yes

Does the electric wire of


Yes
Sensor Harness UX have
disconnection or damage?

No Replace Sensor Harness UX

Yes No
Does the fault recur?

Replace intake fan unit.

No
Does the fault recur?

Yes

Replace the EZJ126 board. Resume the operation

6-52

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


6.4.16 Makeup Eject Pressure Low

Makeup eject Pressure Low

Replace makeup filter

Yes
Is the problem fixed?

No

No
Does MV8 operate?

Yes
Replace MV8

No Yes
Is the problem fixed?

Replace the makeup pump. Resume the operation

6-53

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


6.4.17 Inside Temperature Too High

●The Ink recovery behavior of Acetone-based ink degrades as the inside temperature
gets high.
※Both MEK-based ink and Ethanol-based ink have similar characteristics in which the
ink recovery behavior degrades as the inside temperature gets high.
However, particular attention shall be given to Acetone-based ink.
●Follow the troubleshoot as described below to restore the situation
●When you resume the operation, confirm the recovery status first.

Inside Temperature Too High

Is the ambient temperature 35 degree C Yes


or higher?

No
Lower the ambient temperature using an air
conditioner, etc.

No Yes
Is the problem fixed?

Yes
Does the alarm “Cooling Fan Warning occur?

No

Refer to “6.4.15 Cooling Fan Warning”

No Yes
Is the problem fixed?

Replace air filter and R air filter.

Yes
Is the problem fixed?

No

No
Is enough space secured for the printer installation?

Yes
Refer to “2 INSTALLING PREPCAUTIONS” in
Technical Manual and follow the described procedures
to secure enough space for the maintenance area.

No Yes
Is the problem fixed?

Refer to ”6.2.22 Inside Temperature Sensor Fault”


Resume the operation

6-54

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


6.4.18 Parts Life Expired

Parts Life Expired

Open <Periodic replacement parts


mgmt.> screen and check the parts whose
operation time exceeded the alarm time.

Shut off the power. Replace the parts whose


operation time exceeded the alarm time.

Turn on the power. Open <Periodic replacement


parts mgmt.> screen to reset the operation
time of the replaced parts to zero.

No
Is the alarm cancelled?

Yes

Resume the operation

6-55

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


6.4.19 Ink Level Sensor Broken (2)

Ink Level Sensor


Broken (2)

Was the validation of Ink ID


performed at Ink cartridge
bottle replacement?

Validate the Ink ID and replace


the Ink cartridge bottle.

Resume
operation

[Caution]
1. When this fault occurs, “Ink Low Warning 2” will be issued after one (1) hour passes.
This alarm is different from the prior and existing “Ink Low Warning”. Then, the printer
goes into Stop status with “Ink Low Fault 2” displayed.
2. Ink can be ejected by pressing the Startup button on the Home screen.

6-56

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


6.4.20 Makeup Level Sensor Broken (2)

Makeup Level
Sensor Broken (2)

Was the validation of Makeup


ID performed at Makeup
cartridge bottle replacement?

Validate the Makeup ID and


replace the Makeup cartridge
bottle.

Resume
operation

[Caution]
1. When this fault occurs, “Makeup Low Warning 2” is issued after one (1) hour passes.
This alarm is different from the prior and existing “Makeup Low Warning”. Then, the
printer goes into Stop status with “Makeup Low Fault 2” displayed.
2. Ink can be ejected by pressing the Startup button on the Home screen.

6-57

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


6.5 Faults - No on-screen indications
6.5.1 Chipped print (lower dots)

Chipped print

Direction of
Is the ink stream deflection
No
positioned at the
center of the gutter?
Adjust the ink stream Yes
Missing dots
position so that the ink
Is the ink pressure Yes
stream is centered with
higher that the
respect to the gutter.
specified limit?

No Yes
Can the ink pressure be
Has the operating adjusted?
Yes
time exceeded the ink
shelf life? No
Replace the ink. No
Provide pressure relief,
then replace the
Is there ink or dirt pressure-reducing valve.
Yes
buildup on top of the
gutter edge section?
Adjust the ink
Pour the makeup pressure until it is
No
over the gutter edge within the limits.
section to clean it.

No Is the charge
voltage properly
adjusted?

Adjust the charge voltage. Yes

Resume the
operation.

CAUTION
1. If the ink stream is not centered with respect to the gutter,

Ink/foreign dots having a small amount of deflection (lower dots of


Print
matter characters) may collide against the gutter and fail to jet out
drop
of the nozzle head, thereby causing chipped prints.
Position the ink stream at the center of the gutter.
2. If the ink pressure rises, the ink stream flow rate increases
to decrease the amount of deflection, causing dots having a
Gutter small amount of deflection to collide against the gutter and
producing chipped prints. Ensure that the ink pressure
setting is within the specified limits.

6-58

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


6.5.2 Chipped print (upper dots)
Missing
dots

Chipped print

Direction of
Is the ink stream deflection
No
positioned at the
center of the gutter?
Adjust the ink stream Yes
position so that the ink
stream is centered with Is the ink pressure
Yes
respect to the gutter. lower than the
specified limit?

No Can the ink pressure be Yes


Is it possible to make adjusted?
normal prints with the
No
ink pressure raised No
above the specified
Since it is conceivable that the limit?
ink flow path may be clogged, Provide pressure relief and
Yes
clean the ink final filter and then replace the pressure-
joints, backwash the nozzle, reducing valve.
and disassemble and clean the
nozzle.
Is there any ink or dirt
Yes Adjust the ink
Yes Can normal buildup on the plus
pressure until it is
prints be made? deflection electrode? within the limits.

No No

Is the ink stream


Replace the ink. No
positioned at the center
of the charge electrode?

Yes
Adjust the ink
Pour the makeup over
stream position.
the deflection electrode to
clean it.
Is the charge
No
voltage properly
adjusted?
Adjust the charge voltage.
Yes

Resume the
operation.

NOTICE
Do not repeat the nozzle backwash procedure more than two times.
If it is repeated to an excess, the ink becomes thin, thereby
causing disordered prints. If the ink is thin and disordered
prints are encountered, replace the ink.

6-59

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


6.5.3 Varying character height
Varying character
height

Is optimum clearance
No provided between the
nozzle head end and print
target?
Optimize the clearance
between the nozzle head Yes
end and print target.

Was the character


Yes
height setting
changed?
Adjust the character No
height setting.
Is the ink pressure No
within the specified
range?

yes Can the ink pressure be Yes


adjusted?
Yes Is the normal height
obtained when the ink
No
pressure is raised above
the specified limit?
Since it is conceivable that the
Provide pressure relief and
ink flow path may be clogged, No then replace the pressure-
clean the ink final filter and
reducing valve.
joints, backwash the nozzle,
and disassemble and clean the
Is the ink stream
nozzle. No Adjust the ink
positioned at the center
pressure until it is
of the charge electrode?
Yes within the limits.
Are normal prints
Yes
obtained? Adjust the ink
No stream position.

Replace the ink. Is the charge


No
voltage properly
adjusted?
Adjust the charge voltage. Yes

Resume the
operation.

NOTICE
Do not repeat the nozzle backwash procedure more than two times.
If it is repeated to an excess, the ink becomes thin, thereby causing
disordered prints. If the ink is thin and disordered prints are
encountered, replace the ink.

6-60

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


6.5.4 Increased character distortion

Increased character
distortion

Is optimum clearance
No provided between the
nozzle head end and print
target?
Optimize the clearance Yes
between the nozzle head Is the ink pressure Yes
end and print target. higher than the
specified limit?

No

Has the operating Can the ink pressure Yes


Yes
time exceeded the ink
be adjusted?
shelf life?

Replace the ink. No No

No Are ink drops


properly generated?

Adjust the excitation Provide pressure relief and


Yes
voltage and pressure to then replace the pressure-
ensure proper ink drops reducing valve.
generation.
Is the normal height
Yes obtained when the ink Adjust the ink
pressure is raised above pressure until it is
the specified limit? within the limits.
Since it is conceivable that the
ink flow path may be clogged, No
clean the ink final filter and
joints, backwash the nozzle,
and disassemble and clean the
nozzle.

Is the ink stream


No
Yes positioned at the center
Are normal
of the charge electrode?
prints obtained?

No Yes
Adjust the ink
Replace the ink. stream position.

No Is the charge
voltage properly
adjusted?
Adjust the charge voltage.
Yes

Resume the
operation.
NOTICE
Do not repeat the nozzle backwash procedure more than two times.
If it is repeated to an excess, the ink becomes thin, thereby causing
disordered prints. If the ink is thin and disordered prints are encountered,
replace the ink.

6-61

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


6.5.5 Disordered characters

Disordered
characters

Are the upper or Yes


lower print dots
lost?
No See under “Chipped
print”.
Is the upper end of Yes
the print blotted?

No Is the operating
No
temperature with the
specified limits?
Yes Ensure that the operating
temperature is within the
specified limits.
No
There is a noise on Are ink drops No
APH wave farm. properly generated?

Yes Yes Adjust the excitation voltage


and pressure to ensure
proper ink drops
Confirm the print result generation.
With the printhead removed No
From customer’s equipment.
No Are normal prints
Yes obtained?

normal prints are Since it is conceivable that the Yes


obtained? ink flow path may be clogged,
clean the ink final filter and
Yes
joints, backwash the nozzle,
and disassemble and clean the
Ask your customer to nozzle.
Remove any vibration.

Are normal prints Yes


Ensure that the work surface is
free from coating application obtained?
irregularities, water drops, dirt, No
oil, and other foreign matter.

Replace the ink.

Resume the
operation.

NOTICE
Do not repeat the nozzle backwash procedure more than two times.
If it is repeated to an excess, the ink becomes thin, thereby causing
disordered prints. If the ink is thin and disordered prints are
encountered, replace the ink.

6-62

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


6.5.6 Ink leakage/blowout

Ink leakage/blowout

Is the ink stream bent,


dislocated from the
gutter, or brought into Yes
contact with the gutter
edge?
Clean the orifice plate
No and the inside and outside of
the nozzle head cover with the
makeup, and then allow them
Clean the orifice place to thoroughly dry.

with makeup.

Yes Is the ink stream bend


corrected?

No

Execute the nozzle


backwash function.

Yes Is the ink stream bend


corrected?

No

- Remove the orifice plate


from the nozzle, subject it
to ultrasonic cleaning, and
put it back on the nozzle.
- Adjust the ink stream position
so as to place the ink stream at
the center of the gutter.

Resume the
operation.

NOTICE
・ Do not repeat the nozzle backwash procedure more than two times.
If it is repeated to an excess, the ink becomes thin, thereby
incurring disordered prints.
・If the ink is thin and disordered prints are encountered, replace
the ink.
・Ink ejection and ink stop during recovery shall be initiated from
the ink ejection and non-cleaning stop menus on the circulation
control screen

6-63

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


6.5.7 Printing initiation failure in
ready-for-printing state (no prints)

No prints

Does the obtained No


Is the printer in the Yes Is the print start Yes
print consist of
“Ready” state? signal entered?
spaces only?

No No
Yes
Check the print Is the “Product
Enter characters target detector speed matching”
Place the printer in wiring and supply
other than a Yes feature is set to
the “Ready” state. space. voltage and enter “Provide Encoder
the print start based” from the IJ
signal to the IJ printer screen?
printer.
No
Resume the Yes
Are prints made?
operation.

Is the cable between


Connect the cable.
the EZJ126 board
Yes CN11 connector and
Replace the EZJ127
EZJ127 board CN6
board.
connector
disconnected?
No
Are prints made? No

Yes No
Yes Properly enter the No Is the encoder
Yes
Are prints made? signal properly
encoder signal.
entered?

Is the print
Optimize the print
No start delay
start delay setting.
setting
proper?

Yes No Yes
Are prints made?

Replace the EZJ125


board.
Yes No
Are prints made?

Replace the EZJ126


board.
Yes No
Are prints made?

Is the high-
Yes
Connect the cable. voltage cable

disconnected?

Yes No
Are prints made? No

Resume the Replace the high-voltage


operation. power supply unit.

6-64

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


6.5.8 No ink ejection from nozzle
No ink ejection
from nozzle

Does the on-screen


Yes pressure reading No
represent the specified
value?

Execute the nozzle No


Is the pump
backwash function.
motor running?

Yes Yes Is the EZJ126 board


Is the problem CN13 connector,
fixed? Is the Ink flowing Yes
EZJ132 board CN3 No
No from the Ink filter ”C” connector, or pump
Remove the orifice plate No motor connector
from the nozzle, subject it disconnected?
to ultrasonic cleaning, and Replace the ink filter Is the connection Yes
put it back on the nozzle. Yes harness conducting?

No
Yes Is the problem
Yes Is the problem Replace the connection
fixed?
harness
fixed? No
No
Is the Ink flowing from Yes Is the problem Yes
the Reducing valve ”C” fixed?
Does three-way
Yes No No
solenoid valve
MV9 operate?
Replace the pressure-
reducing valve. Connect any
No
disconnected connector.

Replace three-way
Yes Is the problem
solenoid valve MV9. Yes
fixed? Is the problem
No fixed?
Yes No No
Is the problem Is MV1,2,4
fixed? sticking? Replace the
Yes EZJ126 board.
No
Repair the troubled
Replace the MGV solenoid Yes
Is the problem
filter.
fixed?
Replace the MV1,2,4. No
Yes
Is the problem Replace the
fixed? circulation unit.
No

Replace the circulation unit.

NOTICE
Resume the 1.Do not repeat the nozzle backwash
operation.
procedure more than two times.
If it is repeated to an excess, the ink
becomes thin, thereby causing
disordered prints.
2.If the ink is thin and disordered prints
are encountered, replace the ink.

6-65

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


6.5.9 Freeze of display

*) “Freeze of display” means that the touch screen does not operate
without any error message when the screen is touched.

Freeze of display

Turn off and on the power


switch.

Does the screen operate Yes


normally?

No

Download the latest software

Does the screen operate Yes


normally?

No

Disconnect and reconnect the


CN6 of EZJ128 board.

Does the screen operate Yes


normally?

No

Disconnect and reconnect the


CN1 of EZJ126 board and
CN1 of EZJ128 board

Does the screen operate Yes


normally?

No

Replace the touch panel

Does the screen operate Yes


normally?

No

Replace EZJ128 board.

Does the screen operate Yes


normally?

No
Resume the
Replace EZJ126 board.
operation

6-66

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


6.5.10 Problems due to inappropriate ink stream position in charged
electrode
> If the ink stream does not pass through the charged electrode, the following
problems may occur:
(1) The height of printed characters will be larger than standard.
(2) Since the ink drops are not charged normally:
- The character quality will degrade (characters are distorted).
- Print fault, such as appearance of crushed characters, will occur.
(3) Since the amount of charge on ink drops that are slightly charged for auto
phase detection among the dots not used for printing is abnormal, those ink
drops will be excessively deflected by the deflecting field and cannot enter the
gutter hole. Therefore, the gutter will be dirty, causing an alarm of either Ink
Drop Charge Too High or No Ink Drop Charge.
> Check the ink stream passing position in charge electrode, and adjust the electrode
so that the ink stream passes through its center.
> Adjustment procedure:
(1) Loosen the screw holding the charge electrode, use the slight clearance to
change the position of electrode, and then tighten the screw.
(2) Use small pliers to apply force to the bent portion of charge electrode for
correction.

Good

Nozzle

Charge
electrode Ink
stream

Closer Closer

Center Ink stream drifts to one side. Ink stream is oblique

6-67

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


6.5.11 Problems due to inappropriate ink stream position to gutter
> If the ink stream does not enter the center of gutter, the following problems may occur:
(1) The ink stream hits the inner wall of gutter inlet and “splash” occurs. This will dirty
the gutter, causing either Ink Drop Charge Too High or No Ink Drop Charge.
(2) Ink accumulates on outer circumference of gutter, then the character quality will
degrade. (The lower dots of printing to be missing.)
(3) The ink drops charged for auto phase detection are slightly deflected by the
deflecting field. Therefore, if the ink stream position is bent to the positive
electrode side from the center of gutter and A is larger than 2B as shown in figure
below, the ink drops may hit the end surface of gutter.
> Check the ink stream position, and perform adjustment making sure that the ink
stream enters the center of gutter.

Good

Ink
Negative stream
deflection
electrode

Gutter

A>2xB

6-68

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


6.5.12 Increase of dot missing

- “Dot missing” is a phenomenon in which some of


the dots comprising a character are lost.
Generally, missing of one per several thousand Dot
dots is normal, but this may increase if the Deflecting missing
direction
following abnormal status continues:

(1) When equipment was in the ink ejecting status (standby status) but ink was
not ejected due to clogging of nozzle, etc. and equipment was left as was.
(2) Moisture, dust, etc. entered the ink.

If dot missing increases, perform the following troubleshooting, referring to the instruction
manual:
(1) Replace the ink filter
(2) Replace the ink

6-69

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


6.5.13 Handling of the charge related faults

- The model after PX are changed from the model KX in terms of handling of the charge
related faults as follows.

Model KX
Faults Ink ejection Conditions that the fault occur
No electrical Ink is stopped. The APH waveform is checked, and the fault occurs when the APH
charge signal is not detected in a given time.
(No Ink Drop The ink stream bent is detected. The fault is detected in the ready
Charge) state only.
In sufficient Ink is stopped The APH waveform is checked, and the fault occurs when the APH
electrical charge signal is lower than the threshold level in a given time.
(Ink Drop Charge The insufficient electrical charge caused by a fault of the ink drop
Too Low) generation status, and the ink bent are detected. The fault is
detected in the ready state only.
Excessive Ink is stopped The APH waveform is detected, and the fault occurs when APH
electrical charge signal exceed the judgment value in a given time.
(Ink Drop Charge The leakage noise and external noise are detected. The fault is
Too High) detected in the ready state only.

Model UX, RX2, RX, PXR and PX


Faults Ink ejection Conditions that the fault occur
No Ink Drop Ink is stopped. The APH waveform is checked, and the fault occurs when the
Charge (Ink ejection is kept APH signal is not detected in a given time.
in case of the The ink stream bent is detected.
maintenance mode) The fault is detected in the standby state also.
Ink ejection is kept when the IJP is the service maintenance
mode to clear the cause of the trouble.
(The fault occurs when ink is not charged even when the ink is
ejected. In this case, it should be clarified whether the ink drop
generation status is wrong or charge voltage is not output while
ink ejection is kept.)
Ink Drop Charge Ink is stopped The APH waveform is checked, and the fault occurs when the
Too Low APH signal is lower than the threshold level in a given time.
The insufficient electrical charge caused by a fault of the ink drop
generation status, and the ink bent are detected. The fault is
detected in the ready state only.
Ink Drop Charge Ink ejection is The APH waveform is detected, and the fault occurs when APH
Too High kept. signal exceed the judgment value in a given time.
The leakage noise and external noise are detected in the ready
state. The fault is detected in the ready state only.

6-70

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


6.5.14 Failure of adjustment of excitation voltage

Failure of adjustment
of excitation voltage

Is the EZJ125 board CN5 Disconnect and reconnect the


Yes Resume the
connector disconnected or EZJ125 board CN5 connector
correctly. operation.
in poor contact?

No

When the adjustment


Is the DSW1 of Yes Is the excitation Yes Yes
fails, is the voltage of
EZJ125 board frequency properly
TP14 larger than
is properly set? set?
60V?

No No No
1
Correct the excitation
Correct the setting Replace the EZJ126 board.
voltage setting

Yes
1 Is the problem
fixed?
No

Replace the EZJ125 board. Replace the EZJ125 board.

Yes Yes
Is the problem Is the problem
fixed? fixed?

No No

Replace the EZJ126 board. Replace the Nozzle.

Yes Is the problem Is the problem Yes


fixed? fixed?
No No

Replace the Nozzle. Replace the print head.

Yes
Is the problem
fixed?
No

Replace the print head.

Resume the
operation.

6-71

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


6.5.15 System Error

*) This alarm is displayed when download failed.

System Error **

Insert the system-data USB memory and


turn on the power switch.

Yes
Does the fault restore?

No

Make a system-data USB memory again.


Insert the new system-data USB memory
and turn on the power switch to restore.

Yes Resume the


Does the fault restore?
operation
No

Replace the EZJ128 board

6-72

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


6.5.16 Power does not turn ON after pressing Start button

Power does not


turn ON

Does the trouble fixed after


disconnection and reconnection
Yes
of the following connectors?
-CN20, CN23, CN2 of EZJ126
-CN4 of EZJ113
-CN2 of EZJ114

No

Does the trouble fixed after Yes


replacing the EZJ114 board?

No

Does the trouble fixed after Yes


replacing the EZJ113 board?

No

Does the trouble fixed after


Yes
replacing the multiple DC Resume the
power supply ? operation
No

Replace the EZJ126 board

6.5.17 Power does not turn OFF after pressing Stop button

Power does not


turn OFF

Does the trouble fixed after


disconnection and reconnection
Yes
of the following connectors?
-CN20, CN23, CN2 of EZJ126
-CN4 of EZJ113
-CN2 of EZJ114

No

Does the trouble fixed after Yes


replacing the EZJ114 board?

No

Does the trouble fixed after Yes


replacing the EZJ113 board?

No

Resume the
Replace the EZJ126 board
operation

6-73

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


6.5.18 No ink suction from gutter.

No ink suction
from gutter

Low volatilization system is disabled. (UX-E only)

Is the problem Yes


fixed?
No

Is the tube of recovery Yes


line or exhaust line folded?
Or, is ink clogged?
Replace the tube or clean
the tube.

No

No Is the problem Yes


fixed?
No
Does MV3 operate?

Yes
Repair the sticking of
MV3 or replace it.
Refer to “4.20 Cleaning of
dedicated path for Low
No Is the problem Yes volatilization system (UX-E
fixed? only)”.

Execute the “Recovery line


operation check”. *1)

Yes Is the problem


Is the problem Yes fixed?
fixed? No
No

Replace the Exhaust filter.


Replace the recovery filter.

Yes Is the problem


Is the problem Yes
fixed?
fixed?
No
No
Replace the PTFE filter F20-8.8
Clean the gutter and gutter
base. *1) of. Mist collector

Is the problem Yes Yes Is the problem


fixed? fixed?
No No

Replace the recovery pump. Resume the


operation Replace the print head

*1)

“Recovery line operation check”


This operation is the work for checking for ink clogging.
The operational procedure equals to operating in the sequence of Pump→MV3 on “Valve/Pump test”

6-74

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


6.5.19 Power Restoration Procedure

Power Restoration
Procedure

Is the EZJ126 board


CN1 connector Yes
disconnected or in
poor contact?

No

Is the EZJ128 board


CN1 connector Yes
disconnected or in
poor contact?

No
Normality is restored when the
connector is disconnected and then
reconnected.

Replace the EZJ128 board

Does the fault recur? No

Yes
Replace the EZJ126 board.

Resume the
operation.

6-75

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


6.5.20 Startup process after long-term shutdown and How to restore
the operation

“Restart Operation After Long-Term Shutdown”

Solenoid valve verification


Are the valves making No Refer to “4.5 solenoid valve replacement” and/or “5.5 Shutoff valve
operation sound? (MV9) replacement” or “4.15.1 How to restore operation when solenoid
Yes Restore valve seizure occurs”.

Viscometer verification
When the viscometer is working, No
is Red indicator turned OFF?
Refer to “4.12 Troubleshooting when Fault Occurs in Viscometer”
Yes Restore

Recovery line verification Refer to “4.14 Troubleshooting Procedure for the Circulation System”,
Is the ink flow at tube B confirmed at No Trouble symptom [No collection], Probable cause [The collection pump
“Recovery line operation check”? *1) malfunctions].

Yes
Yes No
Is the problem fixed? Refer to “4.14 Troubleshooting Procedure for the
Circulation System”,
Trouble symptom [No collection] and
Restore “6.5.18 No ink suction from gutter”.
Supply/Cleaning line verification
Does makeup eject at “Ink stream Refer to “4.14 Troubleshooting Procedure for the
alignment”? Circulation System”,
No
[NOTE] Trouble symptom [Ink does not jet.],
When the makeup does not eject the 1st Probable cause [The supply pump malfunctions].
time, please try the 2nd time.

Yes Yes No Refer to “4.14 Troubleshooting


Is the problem fixed? Procedure for the Circulation System”, Trouble
symptom [Ink does not jet.] and [Makeup does not
circulate.], and “6.5.8 No ink ejection
Restore
from nozzle”.
Occur
Does “Ink Beam Bent” occur? Refer to “6.5.6 Ink
Not occur leakage/blowout“.
Restore
No

Execute <Process after long-term shutdown>. (*) BOTH “Ink Drainage” AND “Ink Refill” are executed
Yes
(*) TWO TIMES IN A ROW.

Are BOTH “Ink Drainage” AND “Ink Refill” No


Refer to “4.14 Troubleshooting Procedure for the Circulation
executed TWO TIMES IN A ROW?
System, Trouble symptom [Charging or drainage is impossible.]
Yes and [When the message “Failure was detected in level sensor,
Restore
pump, or solenoid valve” is displayed on the screen.].
Circulation line verification
Does an alarm like “Ink pressure low” or “No ink Occur Refer to “4.14 Troubleshooting Procedure for the
drop charge” occur? Circulation System”, Trouble symptom [The ink pressure
does not increase], and
Not occur
Restore “4.12 Troubleshooting when Fault Occurs in Viscometer”.

Does Ink pressure change by arbitrarily rotating No


Refer to “4.14 Troubleshooting Procedure for the Circulation
the handle of Pressure reducing valve? System”, Trouble symptom [The ink pressure does not
Yes Restore increase.] and “4.3 Pressure reducing valve replacement”.

“Restart Operation After Long-Term Shutdown” is completed.

*1) “Recovery line operation check”


This operation is the work for checking for ink clogging.
The operational procedure equals to operating in the sequence of Pump→MV3 on “Valve/Pump test”

6-76

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


6.5.21 Firmware download failure

Firmware
download failure

Insert the system USB to USB slot then turn on printer

Internal communication Yes


error occurred?

No

No
Download is restart?

Yes

Download is complete No
properly?

Yes

Do the system reset by rescue soft

Download is complete No
properly?

Yes

End Replace the EZJ126 board.

6-77

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


6.5.22 Language download failure

Language download
failure

Insert the system USB to USB slot then turn on printer

Go to Language select screen with

service mode

Yes
Registered language is correct?

No

Resister the correct language

No Download is complete properly?

Yes

Print the Kana/Detected char/Kanji

No
Print result is correct?

Yes

Replace the EZJ128 board. Replace the EZJ126 board.


END

6-78

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


6.5.23 Liquid dripping from Air Exhaust

Liquid dripping from Air Exhaust

No
Do MV11and MV12 operate?

Yes

Replace MV11 and/or MV12 or clean any


ink build up or other foreign matters on
MV11/MV12.

No
Is the problem fixed?

Yes

Perform air exhaust washing by pressing “Air


exhaust vent backwash “button. Follow the
instructions and sprinkle makeup over the
opening of Air exhaust of mist separator.

Yes
Is Makeup suctioned?

No

Replace the pump unit. Resume the operation.

6-79

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


6.5.24 Ink deposition on Printhead cover
As the ink is ejected onto the print target, during IJP operation, the printhead cover
(inside/outside) will be stained by the ink splashes back from the print target.
To prevent IJP from printing malfunction caused by the ink staining on Printhead,
check the condition of the printhead cover periodically and clean it as necessary.
The figures below show the mechanism of how the ink splashes are generated and stain the
printhead, and then ink deposition is generated.

Image of ink stain Image of ink stain

Print Print
target target
Ink drops hit each other.

Ink drops on print


target get dried.

Ink drops which reached print target generate When the ink drop hits the one in front of
the ink splashes but a small amount. Ink before it gets dried, many ink splashes
drops get dried soon when the printing speed will be generated.
is slow.
Printing Conditions(left figure) Printing Conditions(right figure)
*Ink drops are placed separately in large *Ink drops are making contacts in small
character height. character height.
*Print speed is slow. *Print speed is fast.

Ink splashes are


negatively-charged
Print because these are
target generated from
negatively-charged ink
drops.

Negatively-charged ink splashes are attracted


by positively-charged deflection electrode and
then ink deposition is generated, which is
formed like a whisker.

6-80

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


6.5.25 Cartridge-ID read failure

Cartridge-ID read
failure

Is the distance No Move the cartridge bottle


between cartridge closer to “Scan here” of
bottle and IJP IJP
30mm or smaller?

Yes
No Can the
cartridge-ID be
read?

Yes
Prepare the other
cartridge bottle
End

Can the No
cartridge-ID be
read?

Yes Turn OFF power.

End

Caution* Is CN27 connector on


Yes
EZJ126 board Remove CN27 connector once
For the cartridge-ID which disconnected or having and reconnect it.
cannot be read at the first poor connection?
scan, there is a possibility of
breakdown of ID tag. No No Turn OFF and ON
In this case, input the Turn OFF power. power and retry
cartridge-ID manually. reading cartridge-ID.

Is the connector of Yes


Remove connector once and Yes RFID reader side
reconnect it. disconnected or having End
poor connection?

Turn OFF and ON No No


Turn OFF power.
power and retry
reading cartridge-ID.

Replace RFID reader.


Yes

Turn OFF and ON Restore RFID reader to the


power and retry No
original one and then replace
reading cartridge-ID. EZJ126 board.

Yes

End

6-81

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


6.5.26 Solenoid unlock failure

Solenoid unlock
failure

Does the lever handle Yes


touch solenoid-pin? Push the lever handle into backward.

No

Is solenoid unlocked when Yes


“Solenoid valve/pump test”
is conducted?

No
Swap the two connectors of Ink
Does MV1 work solenoid cable (13) and Makeup
Yes
during “Solenoid solenoid cable (14) and then check
valve/pump test”? if the solenoids can be unlocked
during “Solenoid valve/pump
test”. (*1)
No No

Yes

Replace the solenoid which cannot


be unlocked in the first place.

Is CN22 connector on
EZJ126 board Yes
End
disconnected or having
poor connection?

No

Is CN2 connector on
Yes
EZJ132 board
disconnected or having
poor connection?

No Remove the connector once and


reconnect it.

Is solenoid unlocked
No when “Solenoid
valve/pump test” is
conducted?

Yes

Replace EZJ126 board.


End

Caution
(*1) Should two connectors of ink/makeup
solenoid be swapped, restore them to their
original position.

6-82

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


7. Attached Drawing
7.1 Circulation System Diagram

Circulation System Diagram(UX-B,D)

7-1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Circulation System Diagram(UX-E)

7-2

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Viscometer

Makeup filter

Pressure sensor Reducing valve

Location of ICU joint

Pump Motor

Location of Solenoid valve

7-3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


7.2 Electrical Connection Diagram
7.2.1 Electrical Connection Diagram [UX-D/E]

Electrical Connection Diagram [UX-D/E]

7-4

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


7.2.2 Electrical Connection Diagram [UX-B] -Basic model

Electrical Connection Diagram [UX-B]

7-5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Sequence Name Eject Ink (Goes to Ready) ON
Operation [Start up] - [Eject ink] OFF
Remarks Start sequence

Step - 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Interval Pre-heating Refresh ink Pressurize Suck Eject Eject ink Suck air in Detect bent Suck air in Interval for Refresh ink Heating Detect the Ready
Outline in the unit supply path circulation makeup the nozzle beam the nozzle stable the MV2 APH (High-
path pressure path condition voltage ON)
Time [sec.] Depends on the environ-
1 15 20 5 1 0.5 1 3 3 20 5 30 10 -
UX ment
MV1: Supply 2.ON 1.ON 3.ON 3.ON 3.ON 3.ON 3.ON 3.ON 2.ON 2.ON 2.ON 2.ON
MV2: Replenishment 1.ON
MV3: Recovery 2.ON 4.ON 4.ON 4.ON 4.ON 4.ON 3.ON 2.ON 3.ON 3.ON 3.ON
MV4: Agitation 3.ON 2.ON 2.ON 2.ON 1.ON 2.ON 1.ON
MV5: Circulation 1.ON 2.ON 2.ON
MV6: Pressure relief 1.ON
MV7: Makeup
MV8: Cleaning 1.ON
MV9: Shutoff 1.ON 5.ON 1.ON 5.ON 1.ON 3.ON 1.ON 1.ON 1.ON

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Pump ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON
7.3 Circulation sequence

Sequence Name Eject Ink (Goes to Standby)


Operation [Control] - [Eject ink] or [Circulation Control] - [Eject ink]
Remarks Start sequence (For mentenance)

Step - 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Interval Pre-heating Refresh ink Pressurize Suck Eject ink Suck air in Interval for Standby
Outline
in the unit supply path circulation the nozzle stable
Time [sec.] path pressure
UX 1 15 20 5 1 1 5 5 -
MV1: Supply 2.ON 1.ON 3.ON 3.ON 3.ON 2.ON 2.ON
MV2: Replenishment
MV3: Recovery 2.ON 4.ON 4.ON 3.ON 3.ON

7-6
MV4: Agitation 3.ON 2.ON 2.ON 1.ON
MV5: Circulation 1.ON 2.ON
MV6: Pressure relief 1.ON
MV7: Makeup
MV8: Cleaning
MV9: Shutoff 1.ON 5.ON 1.ON 1.ON

Pump ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON

Sequence Name Normal Running


Operation -
Remarks Density control sequence

Step 1 2 3 4 5 6
Refresh ink Ink Viscosity Ink Makeup Interval
Outline
the visco- Measurement replenish- replenish-
Time [sec.] meter path 5 times ment ment
UX 120 5 10 360s Max. 20s Max. 1800
MV1: Supply 3.ON 2.ON 2.ON 1.ON 2.ON
MV2: Replenishment 1.ON
MV3: Recovery 4.ON 3.ON 3.ON 2.ON 3.ON 3.ON
MV4: Agitation 2.ON 4.ON
MV5: Circulation
MV6: Pressure relief
MV7: Makeup 2.ON
MV8: Cleaning
MV9: Shutoff 1.ON 1.ON 1.ON 3.ON 4.ON 1.ON
MV10: Viscometer 4.ON
Pump ON ON ON ON ON ON
Sequence Name Cleaning stop
Operation [Shut down]→[Shut down] or [Circulation Control] - [Cleaning stop]
Remarks Suck the circulation / recovery path

Step - 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
High- Interval Pressurize Eject Makeup Check the Pressure- Pressure- Pressure-
Outline
voltage OFF the makeup MV8 OFF relief relief the relief the
Time [sec.] path supply path supply path
UX 1 3 1 20 1 3 1 3 1 2 1.2 0.7 20 5 140 5
MV1: Supply 2.ON 2.ON 2.ON 3.ON 3.ON 3.ON 3.ON 3.ON 3.ON 3.ON 3.ON 2.ON
MV2: Replenishment
MV3: Recovery 3.ON 3.ON 3.ON 4.ON 4.ON 4.ON 4.ON 4.ON 4.ON 2.ON 2.ON 3.ON 2.ON 2.ON
MV4: Agitation 2.ON 2.ON 2.ON 2.ON 2.ON 2.ON 1.ON
MV5: Circulation 1.ON 1.ON 1.ON 1.ON 1.ON 1.ON 1.ON
MV6: Pressure relief 1.ON 1.ON
MV7: Makeup 4.ON
MV8: Cleaning 1.ON 1.ON 5.ON 1.ON 5.ON 1.ON 5.ON
MV9: Shutoff 1.ON 1.ON 4.ON

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Pump ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON
Reduce the

7-7
7.4 Dimensions around charge electrode and deflection electrode

【Nozzle diameter: 65μm】

7-8

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

S-ar putea să vă placă și